Pathloss Determination for Beam Management Sounding Reference Signals

ABSTRACT

A wireless device receives configuration parameters indicating a sounding reference signal (SRS) resource set that is associated with a pathloss reference signal (PL-RS) and comprises a first SRS resource. A downlink control information is received indicating a transmission configuration indicator (TCI) state for a physical shared data channel (PUSCH). A transmit power for the PUSCH is determined based on the PL-RS, in response to: the TCI state being associated with the first SRS resource of the SRS resource set, and the SRS resource set being configured for beam management. A transport block is transmitted, via the PUSCH, based on the transmit power and using the TCI state.

CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

This applications claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No.63/149,916, filed Feb. 16, 2021, which is herein incorporated byreference in its entirety.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

Examples of several of the various embodiments of the present disclosureare described herein with reference to the drawings.

FIG. 1A and FIG. 1B illustrate example mobile communication networks inwhich embodiments of the present disclosure may be implemented.

FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B respectively illustrate a New Radio (NR) user planeand control plane protocol stack.

FIG. 3 illustrates an example of services provided between protocollayers of the NR user plane protocol stack of FIG. 2A.

FIG. 4A illustrates an example downlink data flow through the NR userplane protocol stack of FIG. 2A.

FIG. 4B illustrates an example format of a MAC subheader in a MAC PDU.

FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B respectively illustrate a mapping between logicalchannels, transport channels, and physical channels for the downlink anduplink.

FIG. 6 is an example diagram showing RRC state transitions of a UE.

FIG. 7 illustrates an example configuration of an NR frame into whichOFDM symbols are grouped.

FIG. 8 illustrates an example configuration of a slot in the time andfrequency domain for an NR carrier.

FIG. 9 illustrates an example of bandwidth adaptation using threeconfigured BWPs for an NR carrier.

FIG. 10A illustrates three carrier aggregation configurations with twocomponent carriers.

FIG. 10B illustrates an example of how aggregated cells may beconfigured into one or more PUCCH groups.

FIG. 11A illustrates an example of an SS/PBCH block structure andlocation.

FIG. 11B illustrates an example of CSI-RS s that are mapped in the timeand frequency domains.

FIG. 12A and FIG. 12B respectively illustrate examples of three downlinkand uplink beam management procedures.

FIG. 13A, FIG. 13B, and FIG. 13C respectively illustrate a four-stepcontention-based random access procedure, a two-step contention-freerandom access procedure, and another two-step random access procedure.

FIG. 14A illustrates an example of CORESET configurations for abandwidth part.

FIG. 14B illustrates an example of a CCE-to-REG mapping for DCItransmission on a CORESET and PDCCH processing.

FIG. 15 illustrates an example of a wireless device in communicationwith a base station.

FIG. 16A, FIG. 16B, FIG. 16C, and FIG. 16D illustrate example structuresfor uplink and downlink transmission.

FIG. 17 illustrates configuration parameters for a wireless device toreceive control and/or data from a base station as per an aspect of anexample embodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 18 illustrates configuration parameters for a wireless device totransmit control and/or data from a base station as per an aspect of anexample embodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 19 illustrates a first mode of TCI state update mechanism as per anaspect of an example embodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 20 illustrates a scenario of a multiple transmission and receptionpoint (TRP) and multiple panels as per an aspect of an exampleembodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 21 illustrates an example embodiment of a second mode of TCI stateupdate mechanism as per an aspect of an example embodiment of thepresent disclosure.

FIG. 22 illustrates an example scenario of pathloss reference RSdetermination as per an aspect of an example embodiment of the presentdisclosure.

FIG. 23A illustrates configuration parameters for an SRS resource set asper an aspect of an example embodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 23B illustrates configuration parameters for an SRS resource set asper an aspect of an example embodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 24A illustrates configuration parameters for an SRS resource as peran aspect of an example embodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 24B illustrates configuration parameters for an SRS resource as peran aspect of an example embodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 25 illustrates an example scenario of pathloss reference RSdetermination as per an aspect of an example embodiment of the presentdisclosure.

FIG. 26 illustrates an example scenario of pathloss reference RSdetermination as per an aspect of an example embodiment of the presentdisclosure.

FIG. 27 illustrates an example scenario of pathloss reference RSdetermination as per an aspect of an example embodiment of the presentdisclosure.

FIG. 28 illustrates an example scenario of pathloss reference RSdetermination as per an aspect of an example embodiment of the presentdisclosure.

FIG. 29A illustrates an example format of a MAC CE updating a pathlossreference RS for an SRS resource set as per an aspect of an exampleembodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 29B illustrates an example format of a MAC CE updating a pathlossreference RS for a TCI state as per an aspect of an example embodimentof the present disclosure.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION

In the present disclosure, various embodiments are presented as examplesof how the disclosed techniques may be implemented and/or how thedisclosed techniques may be practiced in environments and scenarios. Itwill be apparent to persons skilled in the relevant art that variouschanges in form and detail can be made therein without departing fromthe scope. In fact, after reading the description, it will be apparentto one skilled in the relevant art how to implement alternativeembodiments. The present embodiments should not be limited by any of thedescribed exemplary embodiments. The embodiments of the presentdisclosure will be described with reference to the accompanyingdrawings. Limitations, features, and/or elements from the disclosedexample embodiments may be combined to create further embodiments withinthe scope of the disclosure. Any figures which highlight thefunctionality and advantages, are presented for example purposes only.The disclosed architecture is sufficiently flexible and configurable,such that it may be utilized in ways other than that shown. For example,the actions listed in any flowchart may be re-ordered or only optionallyused in some embodiments.

Embodiments may be configured to operate as needed. The disclosedmechanism may be performed when certain criteria are met, for example,in a wireless device, a base station, a radio environment, a network, acombination of the above, and/or the like. Example criteria may bebased, at least in part, on for example, wireless device or network nodeconfigurations, traffic load, initial system set up, packet sizes,traffic characteristics, a combination of the above, and/or the like.When the one or more criteria are met, various example embodiments maybe applied. Therefore, it may be possible to implement exampleembodiments that selectively implement disclosed protocols.

A base station may communicate with a mix of wireless devices. Wirelessdevices and/or base stations may support multiple technologies, and/ormultiple releases of the same technology. Wireless devices may have somespecific capability(ies) depending on wireless device category and/orcapability(ies). When this disclosure refers to a base stationcommunicating with a plurality of wireless devices, this disclosure mayrefer to a subset of the total wireless devices in a coverage area. Thisdisclosure may refer to, for example, a plurality of wireless devices ofa given LTE or 5G release with a given capability and in a given sectorof the base station. The plurality of wireless devices in thisdisclosure may refer to a selected plurality of wireless devices, and/ora subset of total wireless devices in a coverage area which performaccording to disclosed methods, and/or the like. There may be aplurality of base stations or a plurality of wireless devices in acoverage area that may not comply with the disclosed methods, forexample, those wireless devices or base stations may perform based onolder releases of LTE or 5G technology.

In this disclosure, “a” and “an” and similar phrases are to beinterpreted as “at least one” and “one or more.” Similarly, any termthat ends with the suffix “(s)” is to be interpreted as “at least one”and “one or more.” In this disclosure, the term “may” is to beinterpreted as “may, for example.” In other words, the term “may” isindicative that the phrase following the term “may” is an example of oneof a multitude of suitable possibilities that may, or may not, beemployed by one or more of the various embodiments. The terms“comprises” and “consists of”, as used herein, enumerate one or morecomponents of the element being described. The term “comprises” isinterchangeable with “includes” and does not exclude unenumeratedcomponents from being included in the element being described. Bycontrast, “consists of” provides a complete enumeration of the one ormore components of the element being described. The term “based on”, asused herein, should be interpreted as “based at least in part on” ratherthan, for example, “based solely on”. The term “and/or” as used hereinrepresents any possible combination of enumerated elements. For example,“A, B, and/or C” may represent A; B; C; A and B; A and C; B and C; or A,B, and C.

If A and B are sets and every element of A is an element of B, A iscalled a subset of B. In this specification, only non-empty sets andsubsets are considered. For example, possible subsets of B={cell1,cell2} are: {cell1}, {cell2}, and {cell1, cell2}. The phrase “based on”(or equally “based at least on”) is indicative that the phrase followingthe term “based on” is an example of one of a multitude of suitablepossibilities that may, or may not, be employed to one or more of thevarious embodiments. The phrase “in response to” (or equally “inresponse at least to”) is indicative that the phrase following thephrase “in response to” is an example of one of a multitude of suitablepossibilities that may, or may not, be employed to one or more of thevarious embodiments. The phrase “depending on” (or equally “depending atleast to”) is indicative that the phrase following the phrase “dependingon” is an example of one of a multitude of suitable possibilities thatmay, or may not, be employed to one or more of the various embodiments.The phrase “employing/using” (or equally “employing/using at least”) isindicative that the phrase following the phrase “employing/using” is anexample of one of a multitude of suitable possibilities that may, or maynot, be employed to one or more of the various embodiments.

The term configured may relate to the capacity of a device whether thedevice is in an operational or non-operational state. Configured mayrefer to specific settings in a device that effect the operationalcharacteristics of the device whether the device is in an operational ornon-operational state. In other words, the hardware, software, firmware,registers, memory values, and/or the like may be “configured” within adevice, whether the device is in an operational or nonoperational state,to provide the device with specific characteristics. Terms such as “acontrol message to cause in a device” may mean that a control messagehas parameters that may be used to configure specific characteristics ormay be used to implement certain actions in the device, whether thedevice is in an operational or non-operational state.

In this disclosure, parameters (or equally called, fields, orInformation elements: IEs) may comprise one or more information objects,and an information object may comprise one or more other objects. Forexample, if parameter (IE) N comprises parameter (IE) M, and parameter(IE) M comprises parameter (IE) K, and parameter (IE) K comprisesparameter (information element) J. Then, for example, N comprises K, andN comprises J. In an example embodiment, when one or more messagescomprise a plurality of parameters, it implies that a parameter in theplurality of parameters is in at least one of the one or more messages,but does not have to be in each of the one or more messages.

Many features presented are described as being optional through the useof “may” or the use of parentheses. For the sake of brevity andlegibility, the present disclosure does not explicitly recite each andevery permutation that may be obtained by choosing from the set ofoptional features. The present disclosure is to be interpreted asexplicitly disclosing all such permutations. For example, a systemdescribed as having three optional features may be embodied in sevenways, namely with just one of the three possible features, with any twoof the three possible features or with three of the three possiblefeatures.

Many of the elements described in the disclosed embodiments may beimplemented as modules. A module is defined here as an element thatperforms a defined function and has a defined interface to otherelements. The modules described in this disclosure may be implemented inhardware, software in combination with hardware, firmware, wetware (e.g.hardware with a biological element) or a combination thereof, which maybe behaviorally equivalent. For example, modules may be implemented as asoftware routine written in a computer language configured to beexecuted by a hardware machine (such as C, C++, Fortran, Java, Basic,Matlab or the like) or a modeling/simulation program such as Simulink,Stateflow, GNU Octave, or Lab VIEWMathScript. It may be possible toimplement modules using physical hardware that incorporates discrete orprogrammable analog, digital and/or quantum hardware. Examples ofprogrammable hardware comprise: computers, microcontrollers,microprocessors, application-specific integrated circuits (ASICs); fieldprogrammable gate arrays (FPGAs); and complex programmable logic devices(CPLDs). Computers, microcontrollers and microprocessors are programmedusing languages such as assembly, C, C++or the like. FPGAs, ASICs andCPLDs are often programmed using hardware description languages (HDL)such as VHSIC hardware description language (VHDL) or Verilog thatconfigure connections between internal hardware modules with lesserfunctionality on a programmable device. The mentioned technologies areoften used in combination to achieve the result of a functional module.

FIG. 1A illustrates an example of a mobile communication network 100 inwhich embodiments of the present disclosure may be implemented. Themobile communication network 100 may be, for example, a public landmobile network (PLMN) run by a network operator. As illustrated in FIG.1A, the mobile communication network 100 includes a core network (CN)102, a radio access network (RAN) 104, and a wireless device 106.

The CN 102 may provide the wireless device 106 with an interface to oneor more data networks (DNs), such as public DNs (e.g., the Internet),private DNs, and/or intra-operator DNs. As part of the interfacefunctionality, the CN 102 may set up end-to-end connections between thewireless device 106 and the one or more DNs, authenticate the wirelessdevice 106, and provide charging functionality.

The RAN 104 may connect the CN 102 to the wireless device 106 throughradio communications over an air interface. As part of the radiocommunications, the RAN 104 may provide scheduling, radio resourcemanagement, and retransmission protocols. The communication directionfrom the RAN 104 to the wireless device 106 over the air interface isknown as the downlink and the communication direction from the wirelessdevice 106 to the RAN 104 over the air interface is known as the uplink.Downlink transmissions may be separated from uplink transmissions usingfrequency division duplexing (FDD), time-division duplexing (TDD),and/or some combination of the two duplexing techniques.

The term wireless device may be used throughout this disclosure to referto and encompass any mobile device or fixed (non-mobile) device forwhich wireless communication is needed or usable. For example, awireless device may be a telephone, smart phone, tablet, computer,laptop, sensor, meter, wearable device, Internet of Things (IoT) device,vehicle road side unit (RSU), relay node, automobile, and/or anycombination thereof. The term wireless device encompasses otherterminology, including user equipment (UE), user terminal (UT), accessterminal (AT), mobile station, handset, wireless transmit and receiveunit (WTRU), and/or wireless communication device.

The RAN 104 may include one or more base stations (not shown). The termbase station may be used throughout this disclosure to refer to andencompass a Node B (associated with UMTS and/or 3G standards), anEvolved Node B (eNB, associated with E-UTRA and/or 4G standards), aremote radio head (RRH), a baseband processing unit coupled to one ormore RRHs, a repeater node or relay node used to extend the coveragearea of a donor node, a Next Generation Evolved Node B (ng-eNB), aGeneration Node B (gNB, associated with NR and/or 5G standards), anaccess point (AP, associated with, for example, WiFi or any othersuitable wireless communication standard), and/or any combinationthereof. A base station may comprise at least one gNB Central Unit(gNB-CU) and at least one a gNB Distributed Unit (gNB-DU).

A base station included in the RAN 104 may include one or more sets ofantennas for communicating with the wireless device 106 over the airinterface. For example, one or more of the base stations may includethree sets of antennas to respectively control three cells (or sectors).The size of a cell may be determined by a range at which a receiver(e.g., a base station receiver) can successfully receive thetransmissions from a transmitter (e.g., a wireless device transmitter)operating in the cell. Together, the cells of the base stations mayprovide radio coverage to the wireless device 106 over a wide geographicarea to support wireless device mobility.

In addition to three-sector sites, other implementations of basestations are possible. For example, one or more of the base stations inthe RAN 104 may be implemented as a sectored site with more or less thanthree sectors. One or more of the base stations in the RAN 104 may beimplemented as an access point, as a baseband processing unit coupled toseveral remote radio heads (RRHs), and/or as a repeater or relay nodeused to extend the coverage area of a donor node. A baseband processingunit coupled to RRHs may be part of a centralized or cloud RANarchitecture, where the baseband processing unit may be eithercentralized in a pool of baseband processing units or virtualized. Arepeater node may amplify and rebroadcast a radio signal received from adonor node. A relay node may perform the same/similar functions as arepeater node but may decode the radio signal received from the donornode to remove noise before amplifying and rebroadcasting the radiosignal.

The RAN 104 may be deployed as a homogenous network of macrocell basestations that have similar antenna patterns and similar high-leveltransmit powers. The RAN 104 may be deployed as a heterogeneous network.In heterogeneous networks, small cell base stations may be used toprovide small coverage areas, for example, coverage areas that overlapwith the comparatively larger coverage areas provided by macrocell basestations. The small coverage areas may be provided in areas with highdata traffic (or so-called “hotspots”) or in areas with weak macrocellcoverage. Examples of small cell base stations include, in order ofdecreasing coverage area, microcell base stations, picocell basestations, and femtocell base stations or home base stations.

The Third-Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) was formed in 1998 toprovide global standardization of specifications for mobilecommunication networks similar to the mobile communication network 100in FIG. 1A. To date, 3GPP has produced specifications for threegenerations of mobile networks: a third generation (3G) network known asUniversal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS), a fourth generation(4G) network known as Long-Term Evolution (LTE), and a fifth generation(5G) network known as 5G System (5GS). Embodiments of the presentdisclosure are described with reference to the RAN of a 3GPP 5G network,referred to as next-generation RAN (NG-RAN). Embodiments may beapplicable to RANs of other mobile communication networks, such as theRAN 104 in FIG. 1A, the RANs of earlier 3G and 4G networks, and those offuture networks yet to be specified (e.g., a 3GPP 6G network). NG-RANimplements 5G radio access technology known as New Radio (NR) and may beprovisioned to implement 4G radio access technology or other radioaccess technologies, including non-3GPP radio access technologies.

FIG. 1B illustrates another example mobile communication network 150 inwhich embodiments of the present disclosure may be implemented. Mobilecommunication network 150 may be, for example, a PLMN run by a networkoperator. As illustrated in FIG. 1B, mobile communication network 150includes a 5G core network (5G-CN) 152, an NG-RAN 154, and UEs 156A and156B (collectively UEs 156). These components may be implemented andoperate in the same or similar manner as corresponding componentsdescribed with respect to FIG. 1A.

The 5G-CN 152 provides the UEs 156 with an interface to one or more DNs,such as public DNs (e.g., the Internet), private DNs, and/orintra-operator DNs. As part of the interface functionality, the 5G-CN152 may set up end-to-end connections between the UEs 156 and the one ormore DNs, authenticate the UEs 156, and provide charging functionality.Compared to the CN of a 3GPP 4G network, the basis of the 5G-CN 152 maybe a service-based architecture. This means that the architecture of thenodes making up the 5G-CN 152 may be defined as network functions thatoffer services via interfaces to other network functions. The networkfunctions of the 5G-CN 152 may be implemented in several ways, includingas network elements on dedicated or shared hardware, as softwareinstances running on dedicated or shared hardware, or as virtualizedfunctions instantiated on a platform (e.g., a cloud-based platform).

As illustrated in FIG. 1B, the 5G-CN 152 includes an Access and MobilityManagement Function (AMF) 158A and a User Plane Function (UPF) 158B,which are shown as one component AMF/UPF 158 in FIG. 1B for ease ofillustration. The UPF 158B may serve as a gateway between the NG-RAN 154and the one or more DNs. The UPF 158B may perform functions such aspacket routing and forwarding, packet inspection and user plane policyrule enforcement, traffic usage reporting, uplink classification tosupport routing of traffic flows to the one or more DNs, quality ofservice (QoS) handling for the user plane (e.g., packet filtering,gating, uplink/downlink rate enforcement, and uplink trafficverification), downlink packet buffering, and downlink data notificationtriggering. The UPF 158B may serve as an anchor point forintra-/inter-Radio Access Technology (RAT) mobility, an externalprotocol (or packet) data unit (PDU) session point of interconnect tothe one or more DNs, and/or a branching point to support a multi-homedPDU session. The UEs 156 may be configured to receive services through aPDU session, which is a logical connection between a UE and a DN.

The AMF 158A may perform functions such as Non-Access Stratum (NAS)signaling termination, NAS signaling security, Access Stratum (AS)security control, inter-CN node signaling for mobility between 3GPPaccess networks, idle mode UE reachability (e.g., control and executionof paging retransmission), registration area management, intra-systemand inter-system mobility support, access authentication, accessauthorization including checking of roaming rights, mobility managementcontrol (subscription and policies), network slicing support, and/orsession management function (SMF) selection. NAS may refer to thefunctionality operating between a CN and a UE, and AS may refer to thefunctionality operating between the UE and a RAN.

The 5G-CN 152 may include one or more additional network functions thatare not shown in FIG. 1B for the sake of clarity. For example, the 5G-CN152 may include one or more of a Session Management Function (SMF), anNR Repository Function (NRF), a Policy Control Function (PCF), a NetworkExposure Function (NEF), a Unified Data Management (UDM), an ApplicationFunction (AF), and/or an Authentication Server Function (AUSF).

The NG-RAN 154 may connect the 5G-CN 152 to the UEs 156 through radiocommunications over the air interface. The NG-RAN 154 may include one ormore gNB s, illustrated as gNB 160A and gNB 160B (collectively gNB s160) and/or one or more ng-eNB s, illustrated as ng-eNB 162A and ng-eNB162B (collectively ng-eNB s 162). The gNBs 160 and ng-eNB s 162 may bemore generically referred to as base stations. The gNB s 160 and ng-eNBs 162 may include one or more sets of antennas for communicating withthe UEs 156 over an air interface. For example, one or more of the gNBs160 and/or one or more of the ng-eNBs 162 may include three sets ofantennas to respectively control three cells (or sectors). Together, thecells of the gNBs 160 and the ng-eNBs 162 may provide radio coverage tothe UEs 156 over a wide geographic area to support UE mobility.

As shown in FIG. 1B, the gNBs 160 and/or the ng-eNBs 162 may beconnected to the 5G-CN 152 by means of an NG interface and to other basestations by an Xn interface. The NG and Xn interfaces may be establishedusing direct physical connections and/or indirect connections over anunderlying transport network, such as an Internet protocol (IP)transport network. The gNBs 160 and/or the ng-eNBs 162 may be connectedto the UEs 156 by means of a Uu interface. For example, as illustratedin FIG. 1B, gNB 160A may be connected to the UE 156A by means of a Uuinterface. The NG, Xn, and Uu interfaces are associated with a protocolstack. The protocol stacks associated with the interfaces may be used bythe network elements in FIG. 1B to exchange data and signaling messagesand may include two planes: a user plane and a control plane. The userplane may handle data of interest to a user. The control plane mayhandle signaling messages of interest to the network elements.

The gNBs 160 and/or the ng-eNBs 162 may be connected to one or moreAMF/UPF functions of the 5G-CN 152, such as the AMF/UPF 158, by means ofone or more NG interfaces. For example, the gNB 160A may be connected tothe UPF 158B of the AMF/UPF 158 by means of an NG-User plane (NG-U)interface. The NG-U interface may provide delivery (e.g., non-guaranteeddelivery) of user plane PDUs between the gNB 160A and the UPF 158B. ThegNB 160A may be connected to the AMF 158A by means of an NG-Controlplane (NG-C) interface. The NG-C interface may provide, for example, NGinterface management, UE context management, UE mobility management,transport of NAS messages, paging, PDU session management, andconfiguration transfer and/or warning message transmission.

The gNBs 160 may provide NR user plane and control plane protocolterminations towards the UEs 156 over the Uu interface. For example, thegNB 160A may provide NR user plane and control plane protocolterminations toward the UE 156A over a Uu interface associated with afirst protocol stack. The ng-eNBs 162 may provide Evolved UMTSTerrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) user plane and control plane protocolterminations towards the UEs 156 over a Uu interface, where E-UTRArefers to the 3GPP 4G radio-access technology. For example, the ng-eNB162B may provide E-UTRA user plane and control plane protocolterminations towards the UE 156B over a Uu interface associated with asecond protocol stack.

The 5G-CN 152 was described as being configured to handle NR and 4Gradio accesses. It will be appreciated by one of ordinary skill in theart that it may be possible for NR to connect to a 4G core network in amode known as “non-standalone operation.” In non-standalone operation, a4G core network is used to provide (or at least support) control-planefunctionality (e.g., initial access, mobility, and paging). Althoughonly one AMF/UPF 158 is shown in FIG. 1B, one gNB or ng-eNB may beconnected to multiple AMF/UPF nodes to provide redundancy and/or to loadshare across the multiple AMF/UPF nodes.

As discussed, an interface (e.g., Uu, Xn, and NG interfaces) between thenetwork elements in FIG. 1B may be associated with a protocol stack thatthe network elements use to exchange data and signaling messages. Aprotocol stack may include two planes: a user plane and a control plane.The user plane may handle data of interest to a user, and the controlplane may handle signaling messages of interest to the network elements.

FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B respectively illustrate examples of NR user planeand NR control plane protocol stacks for the Uu interface that liesbetween a UE 210 and a gNB 220. The protocol stacks illustrated in FIG.2A and FIG. 2B may be the same or similar to those used for the Uuinterface between, for example, the UE 156A and the gNB 160A shown inFIG. 1B.

FIG. 2A illustrates a NR user plane protocol stack comprising fivelayers implemented in the UE 210 and the gNB 220. At the bottom of theprotocol stack, physical layers (PHYs) 211 and 221 may provide transportservices to the higher layers of the protocol stack and may correspondto layer 1 of the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) model. The nextfour protocols above PHYs 211 and 221 comprise media access controllayers (MACs) 212 and 222, radio link control layers (RLCs) 213 and 223,packet data convergence protocol layers (PDCPs) 214 and 224, and servicedata application protocol layers (SDAPs) 215 and 225. Together, thesefour protocols may make up layer 2, or the data link layer, of the OSImodel.

FIG. 3 illustrates an example of services provided between protocollayers of the NR user plane protocol stack. Starting from the top ofFIG. 2A and FIG. 3, the SDAPs 215 and 225 may perform QoS flow handling.The UE 210 may receive services through a PDU session, which may be alogical connection between the UE 210 and a DN. The PDU session may haveone or more QoS flows. A UPF of a CN (e.g., the UPF 158B) may map IPpackets to the one or more QoS flows of the PDU session based on QoSrequirements (e.g., in terms of delay, data rate, and/or error rate).The SDAPs 215 and 225 may perform mapping/de-mapping between the one ormore QoS flows and one or more data radio bearers. Themapping/de-mapping between the QoS flows and the data radio bearers maybe determined by the SDAP 225 at the gNB 220. The SDAP 215 at the UE 210may be informed of the mapping between the QoS flows and the data radiobearers through reflective mapping or control signaling received fromthe gNB 220. For reflective mapping, the SDAP 225 at the gNB 220 maymark the downlink packets with a QoS flow indicator (QFI), which may beobserved by the SDAP 215 at the UE 210 to determine themapping/de-mapping between the QoS flows and the data radio bearers.

The PDCPs 214 and 224 may perform header compression/decompression toreduce the amount of data that needs to be transmitted over the airinterface, ciphering/deciphering to prevent unauthorized decoding ofdata transmitted over the air interface, and integrity protection (toensure control messages originate from intended sources. The PDCPs 214and 224 may perform retransmissions of undelivered packets, in-sequencedelivery and reordering of packets, and removal of packets received induplicate due to, for example, an intra-gNB handover. The PDCPs 214 and224 may perform packet duplication to improve the likelihood of thepacket being received and, at the receiver, remove any duplicatepackets. Packet duplication may be useful for services that require highreliability.

Although not shown in FIG. 3, PDCPs 214 and 224 may performmapping/de-mapping between a split radio bearer and RLC channels in adual connectivity scenario. Dual connectivity is a technique that allowsa UE to connect to two cells or, more generally, two cell groups: amaster cell group (MCG) and a secondary cell group (SCG). A split beareris when a single radio bearer, such as one of the radio bearers providedby the PDCPs 214 and 224 as a service to the SDAPs 215 and 225, ishandled by cell groups in dual connectivity. The PDCPs 214 and 224 maymap/de-map the split radio bearer between RLC channels belonging to cellgroups.

The RLCs 213 and 223 may perform segmentation, retransmission throughAutomatic Repeat Request (ARQ), and removal of duplicate data unitsreceived from MACs 212 and 222, respectively. The RLCs 213 and 223 maysupport three transmission modes: transparent mode (TM); unacknowledgedmode (UM); and acknowledged mode (AM). Based on the transmission mode anRLC is operating, the RLC may perform one or more of the notedfunctions. The RLC configuration may be per logical channel with nodependency on numerologies and/or Transmission Time Interval (TTI)durations. As shown in FIG. 3, the RLCs 213 and 223 may provide RLCchannels as a service to PDCPs 214 and 224, respectively.

The MACs 212 and 222 may perform multiplexing/demultiplexing of logicalchannels and/or mapping between logical channels and transport channels.The multiplexing/demultiplexing may include multiplexing/demultiplexingof data units, belonging to the one or more logical channels, into/fromTransport Blocks (TB s) delivered to/from the PHYs 211 and 221. The MAC222 may be configured to perform scheduling, scheduling informationreporting, and priority handling between UEs by means of dynamicscheduling. Scheduling may be performed in the gNB 220 (at the MAC 222)for downlink and uplink. The MACs 212 and 222 may be configured toperform error correction through Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ)(e.g., one HARQ entity per carrier in case of Carrier Aggregation (CA)),priority handling between logical channels of the UE 210 by means oflogical channel prioritization, and/or padding. The MACs 212 and 222 maysupport one or more numerologies and/or transmission timings. In anexample, mapping restrictions in a logical channel prioritization maycontrol which numerology and/or transmission timing a logical channelmay use. As shown in FIG. 3, the MACs 212 and 222 may provide logicalchannels as a service to the RLCs 213 and 223.

The PHYs 211 and 221 may perform mapping of transport channels tophysical channels and digital and analog signal processing functions forsending and receiving information over the air interface. These digitaland analog signal processing functions may include, for example,coding/decoding and modulation/demodulation. The PHYs 211 and 221 mayperform multi-antenna mapping. As shown in FIG. 3, the PHYs 211 and 221may provide one or more transport channels as a service to the MACs 212and 222.

FIG. 4A illustrates an example downlink data flow through the NR userplane protocol stack. FIG. 4A illustrates a downlink data flow of threeIP packets (n, n+1, and m) through the NR user plane protocol stack togenerate two TB s at the gNB 220. An uplink data flow through the NRuser plane protocol stack may be similar to the downlink data flowdepicted in FIG. 4A.

The downlink data flow of FIG. 4A begins when SDAP 225 receives thethree IP packets from one or more QoS flows and maps the three packetsto radio bearers. In FIG. 4A, the SDAP 225 maps IP packets n and n+1 toa first radio bearer 402 and maps IP packet m to a second radio bearer404. An SDAP header (labeled with an “H” in FIG. 4A) is added to an IPpacket. The data unit from/to a higher protocol layer is referred to asa service data unit (SDU) of the lower protocol layer and the data unitto/from a lower protocol layer is referred to as a protocol data unit(PDU) of the higher protocol layer. As shown in FIG. 4A, the data unitfrom the SDAP 225 is an SDU of lower protocol layer PDCP 224 and is aPDU of the SDAP 225.

The remaining protocol layers in FIG. 4A may perform their associatedfunctionality (e.g., with respect to FIG. 3), add corresponding headers,and forward their respective outputs to the next lower layer. Forexample, the PDCP 224 may perform IP-header compression and cipheringand forward its output to the RLC 223. The RLC 223 may optionallyperform segmentation (e.g., as shown for IP packet m in FIG. 4A) andforward its output to the MAC 222. The MAC 222 may multiplex a number ofRLC PDUs and may attach a MAC subheader to an RLC PDU to form atransport block. In NR, the MAC subheaders may be distributed across theMAC PDU, as illustrated in FIG. 4A. In LTE, the MAC subheaders may beentirely located at the beginning of the MAC PDU. The NR MAC PDUstructure may reduce processing time and associated latency because theMAC PDU subheaders may be computed before the full MAC PDU is assembled.

FIG. 4B illustrates an example format of a MAC subheader in a MAC PDU.The MAC subheader includes: an SDU length field for indicating thelength (e.g., in bytes) of the MAC SDU to which the MAC subheadercorresponds; a logical channel identifier (LCID) field for identifyingthe logical channel from which the MAC SDU originated to aid in thedemultiplexing process; a flag (F) for indicating the size of the SDUlength field; and a reserved bit (R) field for future use.

FIG. 4B further illustrates MAC control elements (CEs) inserted into theMAC PDU by a MAC, such as MAC 223 or MAC 222. For example, FIG. 4Billustrates two MAC CEs inserted into the MAC PDU. MAC CEs may beinserted at the beginning of a MAC PDU for downlink transmissions (asshown in FIG. 4B) and at the end of a MAC PDU for uplink transmissions.MAC CEs may be used for in-band control signaling. Example MAC CEsinclude: scheduling-related MAC CEs, such as buffer status reports andpower headroom reports; activation/deactivation MAC CEs, such as thosefor activation/deactivation of PDCP duplication detection, channel stateinformation (CSI) reporting, sounding reference signal (SRS)transmission, and prior configured components; discontinuous reception(DRX) related MAC CEs; timing advance MAC CEs; and random access relatedMAC CEs. A MAC CE may be preceded by a MAC subheader with a similarformat as described for MAC SDUs and may be identified with a reservedvalue in the LCID field that indicates the type of control informationincluded in the MAC CE.

Before describing the NR control plane protocol stack, logical channels,transport channels, and physical channels are first described as well asa mapping between the channel types. One or more of the channels may beused to carry out functions associated with the NR control planeprotocol stack described later below.

FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B illustrate, for downlink and uplink respectively, amapping between logical channels, transport channels, and physicalchannels. Information is passed through channels between the RLC, theMAC, and the PHY of the NR protocol stack. A logical channel may be usedbetween the RLC and the MAC and may be classified as a control channelthat carries control and configuration information in the NR controlplane or as a traffic channel that carries data in the NR user plane. Alogical channel may be classified as a dedicated logical channel that isdedicated to a specific UE or as a common logical channel that may beused by more than one UE. A logical channel may also be defined by thetype of information it carries. The set of logical channels defined byNR include, for example:

-   -   a paging control channel (PCCH) for carrying paging messages        used to page a UE whose location is not known to the network on        a cell level;    -   a broadcast control channel (BCCH) for carrying system        information messages in the form of a master information block        (MIB) and several system information blocks (SIBs), wherein the        system information messages may be used by the UEs to obtain        information about how a cell is configured and how to operate        within the cell;    -   a common control channel (CCCH) for carrying control messages        together with random access;    -   a dedicated control channel (DCCH) for carrying control messages        to/from a specific the UE to configure the UE; and    -   a dedicated traffic channel (DTCH) for carrying user data        to/from a specific the UE.

Transport channels are used between the MAC and PHY layers and may bedefined by how the information they carry is transmitted over the airinterface. The set of transport channels defined by NR include, forexample:

-   -   a paging channel (PCH) for carrying paging messages that        originated from the PCCH;    -   a broadcast channel (BCH) for carrying the MIB from the BCCH;    -   a downlink shared channel (DL-SCH) for carrying downlink data        and signaling messages, including the SIBs from the BCCH;    -   an uplink shared channel (UL-SCH) for carrying uplink data and        signaling messages; and    -   a random access channel (RACH) for allowing a UE to contact the        network without any prior scheduling.

The PHY may use physical channels to pass information between processinglevels of the PHY. A physical channel may have an associated set oftime-frequency resources for carrying the information of one or moretransport channels. The PHY may generate control information to supportthe low-level operation of the PHY and provide the control informationto the lower levels of the PHY via physical control channels, known asL1/L2 control channels. The set of physical channels and physicalcontrol channels defined by NR include, for example:

-   -   a physical broadcast channel (PBCH) for carrying the MIB from        the BCH;    -   a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) for carrying downlink        data and signaling messages from the DL-SCH, as well as paging        messages from the PCH;    -   a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) for carrying        downlink control information (DCI), which may include downlink        scheduling commands, uplink scheduling grants, and uplink power        control commands;    -   a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) for carrying uplink        data and signaling messages from the UL-SCH and in some        instances uplink control information (UCI) as described below;    -   a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) for carrying UCI,        which may include HARQ acknowledgments, channel quality        indicators (CQI), pre-coding matrix indicators (PMI), rank        indicators (RI), and scheduling requests (SR); and    -   a physical random access channel (PRACH) for random access.

Similar to the physical control channels, the physical layer generatesphysical signals to support the low-level operation of the physicallayer. As shown in FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B, the physical layer signalsdefined by NR include: primary synchronization signals (PSS), secondarysynchronization signals (SSS), channel state information referencesignals (CSI-RS), demodulation reference signals (DMRS), soundingreference signals (SRS), and phase-tracking reference signals (PT-RS).These physical layer signals will be described in greater detail below.

FIG. 2B illustrates an example NR control plane protocol stack. As shownin FIG. 2B, the NR control plane protocol stack may use the same/similarfirst four protocol layers as the example NR user plane protocol stack.These four protocol layers include the PHYs 211 and 221, the MACs 212and 222, the RLCs 213 and 223, and the PDCPs 214 and 224. Instead ofhaving the SDAPs 215 and 225 at the top of the stack as in the NR userplane protocol stack, the NR control plane stack has radio resourcecontrols (RRCs) 216 and 226 and NAS protocols 217 and 237 at the top ofthe NR control plane protocol stack.

The NAS protocols 217 and 237 may provide control plane functionalitybetween the UE 210 and the AMF 230 (e.g., the AMF 158A) or, moregenerally, between the UE 210 and the CN. The NAS protocols 217 and 237may provide control plane functionality between the UE 210 and the AMF230 via signaling messages, referred to as NAS messages. There is nodirect path between the UE 210 and the AMF 230 through which the NASmessages can be transported. The NAS messages may be transported usingthe AS of the Uu and NG interfaces. NAS protocols 217 and 237 mayprovide control plane functionality such as authentication, security,connection setup, mobility management, and session management.

The RRCs 216 and 226 may provide control plane functionality between theUE 210 and the gNB 220 or, more generally, between the UE 210 and theRAN. The RRCs 216 and 226 may provide control plane functionalitybetween the UE 210 and the gNB 220 via signaling messages, referred toas RRC messages. RRC messages may be transmitted between the UE 210 andthe RAN using signaling radio bearers and the same/similar PDCP, RLC,MAC, and PHY protocol layers. The MAC may multiplex control-plane anduser-plane data into the same transport block (TB). The RRCs 216 and 226may provide control plane functionality such as: broadcast of systeminformation related to AS and NAS; paging initiated by the CN or theRAN; establishment, maintenance and release of an RRC connection betweenthe UE 210 and the RAN; security functions including key management;establishment, configuration, maintenance and release of signaling radiobearers and data radio bearers; mobility functions; QoS managementfunctions; the UE measurement reporting and control of the reporting;detection of and recovery from radio link failure (RLF); and/or NASmessage transfer. As part of establishing an RRC connection, RRCs 216and 226 may establish an RRC context, which may involve configuringparameters for communication between the UE 210 and the RAN.

FIG. 6 is an example diagram showing RRC state transitions of a UE. TheUE may be the same or similar to the wireless device 106 depicted inFIG. 1A, the UE 210 depicted in FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B, or any otherwireless device described in the present disclosure. As illustrated inFIG. 6, a UE may be in at least one of three RRC states: RRC connected602 (e.g., RRC_CONNECTED), RRC idle 604 (e.g., RRC IDLE), and RRCinactive 606 (e.g., RRC_INACTIVE).

In RRC connected 602, the UE has an established RRC context and may haveat least one RRC connection with a base station. The base station may besimilar to one of the one or more base stations included in the RAN 104depicted in FIG. 1A, one of the gNB s 160 or ng-eNB s 162 depicted inFIG. 1B, the gNB 220 depicted in FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B, or any other basestation described in the present disclosure. The base station with whichthe UE is connected may have the RRC context for the UE. The RRCcontext, referred to as the UE context, may comprise parameters forcommunication between the UE and the base station. These parameters mayinclude, for example: one or more AS contexts; one or more radio linkconfiguration parameters; bearer configuration information (e.g.,relating to a data radio bearer, signaling radio bearer, logicalchannel, QoS flow, and/or PDU session); security information; and/orPHY, MAC, RLC, PDCP, and/or SDAP layer configuration information. Whilein RRC connected 602, mobility of the UE may be managed by the RAN(e.g., the RAN 104 or the NG-RAN 154). The UE may measure the signallevels (e.g., reference signal levels) from a serving cell andneighboring cells and report these measurements to the base stationcurrently serving the UE. The UE's serving base station may request ahandover to a cell of one of the neighboring base stations based on thereported measurements. The RRC state may transition from RRC connected602 to RRC idle 604 through a connection release procedure 608 or to RRCinactive 606 through a connection inactivation procedure 610.

In RRC idle 604, an RRC context may not be established for the UE. InRRC idle 604, the UE may not have an RRC connection with the basestation. While in RRC idle 604, the UE may be in a sleep state for themajority of the time (e.g., to conserve battery power). The UE may wakeup periodically (e.g., once in every discontinuous reception cycle) tomonitor for paging messages from the RAN. Mobility of the UE may bemanaged by the UE through a procedure known as cell reselection. The RRCstate may transition from RRC idle 604 to RRC connected 602 through aconnection establishment procedure 612, which may involve a randomaccess procedure as discussed in greater detail below.

In RRC inactive 606, the RRC context previously established ismaintained in the UE and the base station. This allows for a fasttransition to RRC connected 602 with reduced signaling overhead ascompared to the transition from RRC idle 604 to RRC connected 602. Whilein RRC inactive 606, the UE may be in a sleep state and mobility of theUE may be managed by the UE through cell reselection. The RRC state maytransition from RRC inactive 606 to RRC connected 602 through aconnection resume procedure 614 or to RRC idle 604 though a connectionrelease procedure 616 that may be the same as or similar to connectionrelease procedure 608.

An RRC state may be associated with a mobility management mechanism. InRRC idle 604 and RRC inactive 606, mobility is managed by the UE throughcell reselection. The purpose of mobility management in RRC idle 604 andRRC inactive 606 is to allow the network to be able to notify the UE ofan event via a paging message without having to broadcast the pagingmessage over the entire mobile communications network. The mobilitymanagement mechanism used in RRC idle 604 and RRC inactive 606 may allowthe network to track the UE on a cell-group level so that the pagingmessage may be broadcast over the cells of the cell group that the UEcurrently resides within instead of the entire mobile communicationnetwork. The mobility management mechanisms for RRC idle 604 and RRCinactive 606 track the UE on a cell-group level. They may do so usingdifferent granularities of grouping. For example, there may be threelevels of cell-grouping granularity: individual cells; cells within aRAN area identified by a RAN area identifier (RAI); and cells within agroup of RAN areas, referred to as a tracking area and identified by atracking area identifier (TAI).

Tracking areas may be used to track the UE at the CN level. The CN(e.g., the CN 102 or the 5GCN 152) may provide the UE with a list ofTAIs associated with a UE registration area. If the UE moves, throughcell reselection, to a cell associated with a TAI not included in thelist of TAIs associated with the UE registration area, the UE mayperform a registration update with the CN to allow the CN to update theUE's location and provide the UE with a new the UE registration area.

RAN areas may be used to track the UE at the RAN level. For a UE in RRCinactive 606 state, the UE may be assigned a RAN notification area. ARAN notification area may comprise one or more cell identities, a listof RAIs, or a list of TAIs. In an example, a base station may belong toone or more RAN notification areas. In an example, a cell may belong toone or more RAN notification areas. If the UE moves, through cellreselection, to a cell not included in the RAN notification areaassigned to the UE, the UE may perform a notification area update withthe RAN to update the UE's RAN notification area.

A base station storing an RRC context for a UE or a last serving basestation of the UE may be referred to as an anchor base station. Ananchor base station may maintain an RRC context for the UE at leastduring a period of time that the UE stays in a RAN notification area ofthe anchor base station and/or during a period of time that the UE staysin RRC inactive 606.

A gNB, such as gNBs 160 in FIG. 1B, may be split in two parts: a centralunit (gNB-CU), and one or more distributed units (gNB-DU). A gNB-CU maybe coupled to one or more gNB-DUs using an F1 interface. The gNB-CU maycomprise the RRC, the PDCP, and the SDAP. A gNB-DU may comprise the RLC,the MAC, and the PHY.

In NR, the physical signals and physical channels (discussed withrespect to FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B) may be mapped onto orthogonal frequencydivisional multiplexing (OFDM) symbols. OFDM is a multicarriercommunication scheme that transmits data over F orthogonal subcarriers(or tones). Before transmission, the data may be mapped to a series ofcomplex symbols (e.g., M-quadrature amplitude modulation (M-QAM) orM-phase shift keying (M-PSK) symbols), referred to as source symbols,and divided into F parallel symbol streams. The F parallel symbolstreams may be treated as though they are in the frequency domain andused as inputs to an Inverse Fast Fourier Transform (IFFT) block thattransforms them into the time domain. The IFFT block may take in Fsource symbols at a time, one from each of the F parallel symbolstreams, and use each source symbol to modulate the amplitude and phaseof one of F sinusoidal basis functions that correspond to the Forthogonal subcarriers. The output of the IFFT block may be Ftime-domain samples that represent the summation of the F orthogonalsubcarriers. The F time-domain samples may form a single OFDM symbol.After some processing (e.g., addition of a cyclic prefix) andup-conversion, an OFDM symbol provided by the IFFT block may betransmitted over the air interface on a carrier frequency. The Fparallel symbol streams may be mixed using an FFT block before beingprocessed by the IFFT block. This operation produces Discrete FourierTransform (DFT)-precoded OFDM symbols and may be used by UEs in theuplink to reduce the peak to average power ratio (PAPR). Inverseprocessing may be performed on the OFDM symbol at a receiver using anFFT block to recover the data mapped to the source symbols.

FIG. 7 illustrates an example configuration of an NR frame into whichOFDM symbols are grouped. An NR frame may be identified by a systemframe number (SFN). The SFN may repeat with a period of 1024 frames. Asillustrated, one NR frame may be 10 milliseconds (ms) in duration andmay include 10 subframes that are 1 ms in duration. A subframe may bedivided into slots that include, for example, 14 OFDM symbols per slot.

The duration of a slot may depend on the numerology used for the OFDMsymbols of the slot. In NR, a flexible numerology is supported toaccommodate different cell deployments (e.g., cells with carrierfrequencies below 1 GHz up to cells with carrier frequencies in themm-wave range). A numerology may be defined in terms of subcarrierspacing and cyclic prefix duration. For a numerology in NR, subcarrierspacings may be scaled up by powers of two from a baseline subcarrierspacing of 15 kHz, and cyclic prefix durations may be scaled down bypowers of two from a baseline cyclic prefix duration of 4.7 μs. Forexample, NR defines numerologies with the following subcarrierspacing/cyclic prefix duration combinations: 15 kHz/4.7 μs; 30 kHz/2.3μs; 60 kHz/1.2 μs; 120 kHz/0.59 μs; and 240 kHz/0.29 μs.

A slot may have a fixed number of OFDM symbols (e.g., 14 OFDM symbols).A numerology with a higher subcarrier spacing has a shorter slotduration and, correspondingly, more slots per subframe. FIG. 7illustrates this numerology-dependent slot duration andslots-per-subframe transmission structure (the numerology with asubcarrier spacing of 240 kHz is not shown in FIG. 7 for ease ofillustration). A subframe in NR may be used as a numerology-independenttime reference, while a slot may be used as the unit upon which uplinkand downlink transmissions are scheduled. To support low latency,scheduling in NR may be decoupled from the slot duration and start atany OFDM symbol and last for as many symbols as needed for atransmission. These partial slot transmissions may be referred to asmini-slot or subslot transmissions.

FIG. 8 illustrates an example configuration of a slot in the time andfrequency domain for an NR carrier. The slot includes resource elements(REs) and resource blocks (RBs). An RE is the smallest physical resourcein NR. An RE spans one OFDM symbol in the time domain by one subcarrierin the frequency domain as shown in FIG. 8. An RB spans twelveconsecutive REs in the frequency domain as shown in FIG. 8. An NRcarrier may be limited to a width of 275 RBs or 275×12=3300 subcarriers.Such a limitation, if used, may limit the NR carrier to 50, 100, 200,and 400 MHz for subcarrier spacings of 15, 30, 60, and 120 kHz,respectively, where the 400 MHz bandwidth may be set based on a 400 MHzper carrier bandwidth limit.

FIG. 8 illustrates a single numerology being used across the entirebandwidth of the NR carrier. In other example configurations, multiplenumerologies may be supported on the same carrier.

NR may support wide carrier bandwidths (e.g., up to 400 MHz for asubcarrier spacing of 120 kHz). Not all UEs may be able to receive thefull carrier bandwidth (e.g., due to hardware limitations). Also,receiving the full carrier bandwidth may be prohibitive in terms of UEpower consumption. In an example, to reduce power consumption and/or forother purposes, a UE may adapt the size of the UE's receive bandwidthbased on the amount of traffic the UE is scheduled to receive. This isreferred to as bandwidth adaptation.

NR defines bandwidth parts (BWPs) to support UEs not capable ofreceiving the full carrier bandwidth and to support bandwidthadaptation. In an example, a BWP may be defined by a subset ofcontiguous RBs on a carrier. A UE may be configured (e.g., via RRClayer) with one or more downlink BWPs and one or more uplink BWPs perserving cell (e.g., up to four downlink BWPs and up to four uplink BWPsper serving cell). At a given time, one or more of the configured BWPsfor a serving cell may be active. These one or more BWPs may be referredto as active BWPs of the serving cell. When a serving cell is configuredwith a secondary uplink carrier, the serving cell may have one or morefirst active BWPs in the uplink carrier and one or more second activeBWPs in the secondary uplink carrier.

For unpaired spectra, a downlink BWP from a set of configured downlinkBWPs may be linked with an uplink BWP from a set of configured uplinkBWPs if a downlink BWP index of the downlink BWP and an uplink BWP indexof the uplink BWP are the same. For unpaired spectra, a UE may expectthat a center frequency for a downlink BWP is the same as a centerfrequency for an uplink BWP.

For a downlink BWP in a set of configured downlink BWPs on a primarycell (PCell), a base station may configure a UE with one or more controlresource sets (CORESETs) for at least one search space. A search spaceis a set of locations in the time and frequency domains where the UE mayfind control information. The search space may be a UE-specific searchspace or a common search space (potentially usable by a plurality ofUEs). For example, a base station may configure a UE with a commonsearch space, on a PCell or on a primary secondary cell (PSCell), in anactive downlink BWP.

For an uplink BWP in a set of configured uplink BWPs, a BS may configurea UE with one or more resource sets for one or more PUCCH transmissions.A UE may receive downlink receptions (e.g., PDCCH or PDSCH) in adownlink BWP according to a configured numerology (e.g., subcarrierspacing and cyclic prefix duration) for the downlink BWP. The UE maytransmit uplink transmissions (e.g., PUCCH or PUSCH) in an uplink BWPaccording to a configured numerology (e.g., subcarrier spacing andcyclic prefix length for the uplink BWP).

One or more BWP indicator fields may be provided in Downlink ControlInformation (DCI). A value of a BWP indicator field may indicate whichBWP in a set of configured BWPs is an active downlink BWP for one ormore downlink receptions. The value of the one or more BWP indicatorfields may indicate an active uplink BWP for one or more uplinktransmissions.

A base station may semi-statically configure a UE with a defaultdownlink BWP within a set of configured downlink BWPs associated with aPCell. If the base station does not provide the default downlink BWP tothe UE, the default downlink BWP may be an initial active downlink BWP.The UE may determine which BWP is the initial active downlink BWP basedon a CORESET configuration obtained using the PBCH.

A base station may configure a UE with a BWP inactivity timer value fora PCell. The UE may start or restart a BWP inactivity timer at anyappropriate time. For example, the UE may start or restart the BWPinactivity timer (a) when the UE detects a DCI indicating an activedownlink BWP other than a default downlink BWP for a paired spectraoperation; or (b) when a UE detects a DCI indicating an active downlinkBWP or active uplink BWP other than a default downlink BWP or uplink BWPfor an unpaired spectra operation. If the UE does not detect DCI duringan interval of time (e.g., 1 ms or 0.5 ms), the UE may run the BWPinactivity timer toward expiration (for example, increment from zero tothe BWP inactivity timer value, or decrement from the BWP inactivitytimer value to zero). When the BWP inactivity timer expires, the UE mayswitch from the active downlink BWP to the default downlink BWP.

In an example, a base station may semi-statically configure a UE withone or more BWPs. A UE may switch an active BWP from a first BWP to asecond BWP in response to receiving a DCI indicating the second BWP asan active BWP and/or in response to an expiry of the BWP inactivitytimer (e.g., if the second BWP is the default BWP).

Downlink and uplink BWP switching (where BWP switching refers toswitching from a currently active BWP to a not currently active BWP) maybe performed independently in paired spectra. In unpaired spectra,downlink and uplink BWP switching may be performed simultaneously.Switching between configured BWPs may occur based on RRC signaling, DCI,expiration of a BWP inactivity timer, and/or an initiation of randomaccess.

FIG. 9 illustrates an example of bandwidth adaptation using threeconfigured BWPs for an NR carrier. A UE configured with the three BWPsmay switch from one BWP to another BWP at a switching point. In theexample illustrated in FIG. 9, the BWPs include: a BWP 902 with abandwidth of 40 MHz and a subcarrier spacing of 15 kHz; a BWP 904 with abandwidth of 10 MHz and a subcarrier spacing of 15 kHz; and a BWP 906with a bandwidth of 20 MHz and a subcarrier spacing of 60 kHz. The BWP902 may be an initial active BWP, and the BWP 904 may be a default BWP.The UE may switch between BWPs at switching points. In the example ofFIG. 9, the UE may switch from the BWP 902 to the BWP 904 at a switchingpoint 908. The switching at the switching point 908 may occur for anysuitable reason, for example, in response to an expiry of a BWPinactivity timer (indicating switching to the default BWP) and/or inresponse to receiving a DCI indicating BWP 904 as the active BWP. The UEmay switch at a switching point 910 from active BWP 904 to BWP 906 inresponse receiving a DCI indicating BWP 906 as the active BWP. The UEmay switch at a switching point 912 from active BWP 906 to BWP 904 inresponse to an expiry of a BWP inactivity timer and/or in responsereceiving a DCI indicating BWP 904 as the active BWP. The UE may switchat a switching point 914 from active BWP 904 to BWP 902 in responsereceiving a DCI indicating BWP 902 as the active BWP.

If a UE is configured for a secondary cell with a default downlink BWPin a set of configured downlink BWPs and a timer value, UE proceduresfor switching BWPs on a secondary cell may be the same/similar as thoseon a primary cell. For example, the UE may use the timer value and thedefault downlink BWP for the secondary cell in the same/similar manneras the UE would use these values for a primary cell.

To provide for greater data rates, two or more carriers can beaggregated and simultaneously transmitted to/from the same UE usingcarrier aggregation (CA). The aggregated carriers in CA may be referredto as component carriers (CCs). When CA is used, there are a number ofserving cells for the UE, one for a CC. The CCs may have threeconfigurations in the frequency domain.

FIG. 10A illustrates the three CA configurations with two CCs. In theintraband, contiguous configuration 1002, the two CCs are aggregated inthe same frequency band (frequency band A) and are located directlyadjacent to each other within the frequency band. In the intraband,non-contiguous configuration 1004, the two CCs are aggregated in thesame frequency band (frequency band A) and are separated in thefrequency band by a gap. In the interband configuration 1006, the twoCCs are located in frequency bands (frequency band A and frequency bandB).

In an example, up to 32 CCs may be aggregated. The aggregated CCs mayhave the same or different bandwidths, subcarrier spacing, and/orduplexing schemes (TDD or FDD). A serving cell for a UE using CA mayhave a downlink CC. For FDD, one or more uplink CCs may be optionallyconfigured for a serving cell. The ability to aggregate more downlinkcarriers than uplink carriers may be useful, for example, when the UEhas more data traffic in the downlink than in the uplink.

When CA is used, one of the aggregated cells for a UE may be referred toas a primary cell (PCell). The PCell may be the serving cell that the UEinitially connects to at RRC connection establishment, reestablishment,and/or handover. The PCell may provide the UE with NAS mobilityinformation and the security input. UEs may have different PCells. Inthe downlink, the carrier corresponding to the PCell may be referred toas the downlink primary CC (DL PCC). In the uplink, the carriercorresponding to the PCell may be referred to as the uplink primary CC(UL PCC). The other aggregated cells for the UE may be referred to assecondary cells (SCells). In an example, the SCells may be configuredafter the PCell is configured for the UE. For example, an SCell may beconfigured through an RRC Connection Reconfiguration procedure. In thedownlink, the carrier corresponding to an SCell may be referred to as adownlink secondary CC (DL SCC). In the uplink, the carrier correspondingto the SCell may be referred to as the uplink secondary CC (UL SCC).

Configured SCells for a UE may be activated and deactivated based on,for example, traffic and channel conditions. Deactivation of an SCellmay mean that PDCCH and PDSCH reception on the SCell is stopped andPUSCH, SRS, and CQI transmissions on the SCell are stopped. ConfiguredSCells may be activated and deactivated using a MAC CE with respect toFIG. 4B. For example, a MAC CE may use a bitmap (e.g., one bit perSCell) to indicate which SCells (e.g., in a subset of configured SCells)for the UE are activated or deactivated. Configured SCells may bedeactivated in response to an expiration of an SCell deactivation timer(e.g., one SCell deactivation timer per SCell).

Downlink control information, such as scheduling assignments andscheduling grants, for a cell may be transmitted on the cellcorresponding to the assignments and grants, which is known asself-scheduling. The DCI for the cell may be transmitted on anothercell, which is known as cross-carrier scheduling. Uplink controlinformation (e.g., HARQ acknowledgments and channel state feedback, suchas CQI, PMI, and/or RI) for aggregated cells may be transmitted on thePUCCH of the PCell. For a larger number of aggregated downlink CCs, thePUCCH of the PCell may become overloaded. Cells may be divided intomultiple PUCCH groups.

FIG. 10B illustrates an example of how aggregated cells may beconfigured into one or more PUCCH groups. A PUCCH group 1010 and a PUCCHgroup 1050 may include one or more downlink CCs, respectively. In theexample of FIG. 10B, the PUCCH group 1010 includes three downlink CCs: aPCell 1011, an SCell 1012, and an SCell 1013. The PUCCH group 1050includes three downlink CCs in the present example: a PCell 1051, anSCell 1052, and an SCell 1053. One or more uplink CCs may be configuredas a PCell 1021, an SCell 1022, and an SCell 1023. One or more otheruplink CCs may be configured as a primary Scell (PSCell) 1061, an SCell1062, and an SCell 1063. Uplink control information (UCI) related to thedownlink CCs of the PUCCH group 1010, shown as UCI 1031, UCI 1032, andUCI 1033, may be transmitted in the uplink of the PCell 1021. Uplinkcontrol information (UCI) related to the downlink CCs of the PUCCH group1050, shown as UCI 1071, UCI 1072, and UCI 1073, may be transmitted inthe uplink of the PSCell 1061. In an example, if the aggregated cellsdepicted in FIG. 10B were not divided into the PUCCH group 1010 and thePUCCH group 1050, a single uplink PCell to transmit UCI relating to thedownlink CCs, and the PCell may become overloaded. By dividingtransmissions of UCI between the PCell 1021 and the PSCell 1061,overloading may be prevented.

A cell, comprising a downlink carrier and optionally an uplink carrier,may be assigned with a physical cell ID and a cell index. The physicalcell ID or the cell index may identify a downlink carrier and/or anuplink carrier of the cell, for example, depending on the context inwhich the physical cell ID is used. A physical cell ID may be determinedusing a synchronization signal transmitted on a downlink componentcarrier. A cell index may be determined using RRC messages. In thedisclosure, a physical cell ID may be referred to as a carrier ID, and acell index may be referred to as a carrier index. For example, when thedisclosure refers to a first physical cell ID for a first downlinkcarrier, the disclosure may mean the first physical cell ID is for acell comprising the first downlink carrier. The same/similar concept mayapply to, for example, a carrier activation. When the disclosureindicates that a first carrier is activated, the specification may meanthat a cell comprising the first carrier is activated.

In CA, a multi-carrier nature of a PHY may be exposed to a MAC. In anexample, a HARQ entity may operate on a serving cell. A transport blockmay be generated per assignment/grant per serving cell. A transportblock and potential HARQ retransmissions of the transport block may bemapped to a serving cell.

In the downlink, a base station may transmit (e.g., unicast, multicast,and/or broadcast) one or more Reference Signals (RSs) to a UE (e.g.,PSS, SSS, CSI-RS, DMRS, and/or PT-RS, as shown in FIG. 5A). In theuplink, the UE may transmit one or more RSs to the base station (e.g.,DMRS, PT-RS, and/or SRS, as shown in FIG. 5B). The PSS and the SSS maybe transmitted by the base station and used by the UE to synchronize theUE to the base station. The PSS and the SSS may be provided in asynchronization signal (SS)/physical broadcast channel (PBCH) block thatincludes the PSS, the SSS, and the PBCH. The base station mayperiodically transmit a burst of SS/PBCH blocks.

FIG. 11A illustrates an example of an SS/PBCH block's structure andlocation. A burst of SS/PBCH blocks may include one or more SS/PBCHblocks (e.g., 4 SS/PBCH blocks, as shown in FIG. 11A). Bursts may betransmitted periodically (e.g., every 2 frames or 20 ms). A burst may berestricted to a half-frame (e.g., a first half-frame having a durationof 5 ms). It will be understood that FIG. 11A is an example, and thatthese parameters (number of SS/PBCH blocks per burst, periodicity ofbursts, position of burst within the frame) may be configured based on,for example: a carrier frequency of a cell in which the SS/PBCH block istransmitted; a numerology or subcarrier spacing of the cell; aconfiguration by the network (e.g., using RRC signaling); or any othersuitable factor. In an example, the UE may assume a subcarrier spacingfor the SS/PBCH block based on the carrier frequency being monitored,unless the radio network configured the UE to assume a differentsubcarrier spacing.

The SS/PBCH block may span one or more OFDM symbols in the time domain(e.g., 4 OFDM symbols, as shown in the example of FIG. 11A) and may spanone or more subcarriers in the frequency domain (e.g., 240 contiguoussubcarriers). The PSS, the SSS, and the PBCH may have a common centerfrequency. The PSS may be transmitted first and may span, for example, 1OFDM symbol and 127 subcarriers. The SSS may be transmitted after thePSS (e.g., two symbols later) and may span 1 OFDM symbol and 127subcarriers. The PBCH may be transmitted after the PSS (e.g., across thenext 3 OFDM symbols) and may span 240 subcarriers.

The location of the SS/PBCH block in the time and frequency domains maynot be known to the UE (e.g., if the UE is searching for the cell). Tofind and select the cell, the UE may monitor a carrier for the PSS. Forexample, the UE may monitor a frequency location within the carrier. Ifthe PSS is not found after a certain duration (e.g., 20 ms), the UE maysearch for the PSS at a different frequency location within the carrier,as indicated by a synchronization raster. If the PSS is found at alocation in the time and frequency domains, the UE may determine, basedon a known structure of the SS/PBCH block, the locations of the SSS andthe PBCH, respectively. The SS/PBCH block may be a cell-defining SSblock (CD-SSB). In an example, a primary cell may be associated with aCD-SSB. The CD-SSB may be located on a synchronization raster. In anexample, a cell selection/search and/or reselection may be based on theCD-SSB.

The SS/PBCH block may be used by the UE to determine one or moreparameters of the cell. For example, the UE may determine a physicalcell identifier (PCI) of the cell based on the sequences of the PSS andthe SSS, respectively. The UE may determine a location of a frameboundary of the cell based on the location of the SS/PBCH block. Forexample, the SS/PBCH block may indicate that it has been transmitted inaccordance with a transmission pattern, wherein a SS/PBCH block in thetransmission pattern is a known distance from the frame boundary.

The PBCH may use a QPSK modulation and may use forward error correction(FEC). The FEC may use polar coding. One or more symbols spanned by thePBCH may carry one or more DMRSs for demodulation of the PBCH. The PBCHmay include an indication of a current system frame number (SFN) of thecell and/or a SS/PBCH block timing index. These parameters mayfacilitate time synchronization of the UE to the base station. The PBCHmay include a master information block (MIB) used to provide the UE withone or more parameters. The MIB may be used by the UE to locateremaining minimum system information (RMSI) associated with the cell.The RMSI may include a System Information Block Type 1 (SIB1). The SIB1may contain information needed by the UE to access the cell. The UE mayuse one or more parameters of the MIB to monitor PDCCH, which may beused to schedule PDSCH. The PDSCH may include the SIB 1. The SIB1 may bedecoded using parameters provided in the MIB. The PBCH may indicate anabsence of SIB 1. Based on the PBCH indicating the absence of SIB1, theUE may be pointed to a frequency. The UE may search for an SS/PBCH blockat the frequency to which the UE is pointed.

The UE may assume that one or more SS/PBCH blocks transmitted with asame SS/PBCH block index are quasi co-located (QCLed) (e.g., having thesame/similar Doppler spread, Doppler shift, average gain, average delay,and/or spatial Rx parameters). The UE may not assume QCL for SS/PBCHblock transmissions having different SS/PBCH block indices.

SS/PBCH blocks (e.g., those within a half-frame) may be transmitted inspatial directions (e.g., using different beams that span a coveragearea of the cell). In an example, a first SS/PBCH block may betransmitted in a first spatial direction using a first beam, and asecond SS/PBCH block may be transmitted in a second spatial directionusing a second beam.

In an example, within a frequency span of a carrier, a base station maytransmit a plurality of SS/PBCH blocks. In an example, a first PCI of afirst SS/PBCH block of the plurality of SS/PBCH blocks may be differentfrom a second PCI of a second SS/PBCH block of the plurality of SS/PBCHblocks. The PCIs of SS/PBCH blocks transmitted in different frequencylocations may be different or the same.

The CSIRS may be transmitted by the base station and used by the UE toacquire channel state information (CSI). The base station may configurethe UE with one or more CSIRSs for channel estimation or any othersuitable purpose. The base station may configure a UE with one or moreof the same/similar CSIRSs. The UE may measure the one or more CSI-RS s.The UE may estimate a downlink channel state and/or generate a CSIreport based on the measuring of the one or more downlink CSI-RS s. TheUE may provide the CSI report to the base station. The base station mayuse feedback provided by the UE (e.g., the estimated downlink channelstate) to perform link adaptation.

The base station may semi-statically configure the UE with one or moreCSIRS resource sets. A CSIRS resource may be associated with a locationin the time and frequency domains and a periodicity. The base stationmay selectively activate and/or deactivate a CSIRS resource. The basestation may indicate to the UE that a CSIRS resource in the CSIRSresource set is activated and/or deactivated.

The base station may configure the UE to report CSI measurements. Thebase station may configure the UE to provide CSI reports periodically,aperiodically, or semi-persistently. For periodic CSI reporting, the UEmay be configured with a timing and/or periodicity of a plurality of CSIreports. For aperiodic CSI reporting, the base station may request a CSIreport. For example, the base station may command the UE to measure aconfigured CSIRS resource and provide a CSI report relating to themeasurements. For semi-persistent CSI reporting, the base station mayconfigure the UE to transmit periodically, and selectively activate ordeactivate the periodic reporting. The base station may configure the UEwith a CSIRS resource set and CSI reports using RRC signaling.

The CSI-RS configuration may comprise one or more parameters indicating,for example, up to 32 antenna ports. The UE may be configured to employthe same OFDM symbols for a downlink CSI-RS and a control resource set(CORESET) when the downlink CSI-RS and CORESET are spatially QCLed andresource elements associated with the downlink CSI-RS are outside of thephysical resource blocks (PRBs) configured for the CORESET. The UE maybe configured to employ the same OFDM symbols for downlink CSI-RS andSS/PBCH blocks when the downlink CSI-RS and SS/PBCH blocks are spatiallyQCLed and resource elements associated with the downlink CSI-RS areoutside of PRBs configured for the SS/PBCH blocks.

Downlink DMRSs may be transmitted by a base station and used by a UE forchannel estimation. For example, the downlink DMRS may be used forcoherent demodulation of one or more downlink physical channels (e.g.,PDSCH). An NR network may support one or more variable and/orconfigurable DMRS patterns for data demodulation. At least one downlinkDMRS configuration may support a front-loaded DMRS pattern. Afront-loaded DMRS may be mapped over one or more OFDM symbols (e.g., oneor two adjacent OFDM symbols). A base station may semi-staticallyconfigure the UE with a number (e.g. a maximum number) of front-loadedDMRS symbols for PDSCH. A DMRS configuration may support one or moreDMRS ports. For example, for single user-MIMO, a DMRS configuration maysupport up to eight orthogonal downlink DMRS ports per UE. Formultiuser-MIMO, a DMRS configuration may support up to 4 orthogonaldownlink DMRS ports per UE. A radio network may support (e.g., at leastfor CP-OFDM) a common DMRS structure for downlink and uplink, wherein aDMRS location, a DMRS pattern, and/or a scrambling sequence may be thesame or different. The base station may transmit a downlink DMRS and acorresponding PDSCH using the same precoding matrix. The UE may use theone or more downlink DMRSs for coherent demodulation/channel estimationof the PDSCH.

In an example, a transmitter (e.g., a base station) may use a precodermatrices for a part of a transmission bandwidth. For example, thetransmitter may use a first precoder matrix for a first bandwidth and asecond precoder matrix for a second bandwidth. The first precoder matrixand the second precoder matrix may be different based on the firstbandwidth being different from the second bandwidth. The UE may assumethat a same precoding matrix is used across a set of PRBs. The set ofPRBs may be denoted as a precoding resource block group (PRG).

A PDSCH may comprise one or more layers. The UE may assume that at leastone symbol with DMRS is present on a layer of the one or more layers ofthe PDSCH. A higher layer may configure up to 3 DMRSs for the PDSCH.

Downlink PT-RS may be transmitted by a base station and used by a UE forphase-noise compensation. Whether a downlink PT-RS is present or not maydepend on an RRC configuration. The presence and/or pattern of thedownlink PT-RS may be configured on a UE-specific basis using acombination of RRC signaling and/or an association with one or moreparameters employed for other purposes (e.g., modulation and codingscheme (MCS)), which may be indicated by DCI. When configured, a dynamicpresence of a downlink PT-RS may be associated with one or more DCIparameters comprising at least MCS. An NR network may support aplurality of PT-RS densities defined in the time and/or frequencydomains. When present, a frequency domain density may be associated withat least one configuration of a scheduled bandwidth. The UE may assume asame precoding for a DMRS port and a PT-RS port. A number of PT-RS portsmay be fewer than a number of DMRS ports in a scheduled resource.Downlink PT-RS may be confined in the scheduled time/frequency durationfor the UE. Downlink PT-RS may be transmitted on symbols to facilitatephase tracking at the receiver.

The UE may transmit an uplink DMRS to a base station for channelestimation. For example, the base station may use the uplink DMRS forcoherent demodulation of one or more uplink physical channels. Forexample, the UE may transmit an uplink DMRS with a PUSCH and/or a PUCCH.The uplink DM-RS may span a range of frequencies that is similar to arange of frequencies associated with the corresponding physical channel.The base station may configure the UE with one or more uplink DMRSconfigurations. At least one DMRS configuration may support afront-loaded DMRS pattern. The front-loaded DMRS may be mapped over oneor more OFDM symbols (e.g., one or two adjacent OFDM symbols). One ormore uplink DMRSs may be configured to transmit at one or more symbolsof a PUSCH and/or a PUCCH. The base station may semi-staticallyconfigure the UE with a number (e.g. maximum number) of front-loadedDMRS symbols for the PUSCH and/or the PUCCH, which the UE may use toschedule a single-symbol DMRS and/or a double-symbol DMRS. An NR networkmay support (e.g., for cyclic prefix orthogonal frequency divisionmultiplexing (CP-OFDM)) a common DMRS structure for downlink and uplink,wherein a DMRS location, a DMRS pattern, and/or a scrambling sequencefor the DMRS may be the same or different.

A PUSCH may comprise one or more layers, and the UE may transmit atleast one symbol with DMRS present on a layer of the one or more layersof the PUSCH. In an example, a higher layer may configure up to threeDMRSs for the PUSCH.

Uplink PT-RS (which may be used by a base station for phase trackingand/or phase-noise compensation) may or may not be present depending onan RRC configuration of the UE. The presence and/or pattern of uplinkPT-RS may be configured on a UE-specific basis by a combination of RRCsignaling and/or one or more parameters employed for other purposes(e.g., Modulation and Coding Scheme (MCS)), which may be indicated byDCI. When configured, a dynamic presence of uplink PT-RS may beassociated with one or more DCI parameters comprising at least MCS. Aradio network may support a plurality of uplink PT-RS densities definedin time/frequency domain. When present, a frequency domain density maybe associated with at least one configuration of a scheduled bandwidth.The UE may assume a same precoding for a DMRS port and a PT-RS port. Anumber of PT-RS ports may be fewer than a number of DMRS ports in ascheduled resource. For example, uplink PT-RS may be confined in thescheduled time/frequency duration for the UE.

SRS may be transmitted by a UE to a base station for channel stateestimation to support uplink channel dependent scheduling and/or linkadaptation. SRS transmitted by the UE may allow a base station toestimate an uplink channel state at one or more frequencies. A schedulerat the base station may employ the estimated uplink channel state toassign one or more resource blocks for an uplink PUSCH transmission fromthe UE. The base station may semi-statically configure the UE with oneor more SRS resource sets. For an SRS resource set, the base station mayconfigure the UE with one or more SRS resources. An SRS resource setapplicability may be configured by a higher layer (e.g., RRC) parameter.For example, when a higher layer parameter indicates beam management, anSRS resource in a SRS resource set of the one or more SRS resource sets(e.g., with the same/similar time domain behavior, periodic, aperiodic,and/or the like) may be transmitted at a time instant (e.g.,simultaneously). The UE may transmit one or more SRS resources in SRSresource sets. An NR network may support aperiodic, periodic and/orsemi-persistent SRS transmissions. The UE may transmit SRS resourcesbased on one or more trigger types, wherein the one or more triggertypes may comprise higher layer signaling (e.g., RRC) and/or one or moreDCI formats. In an example, at least one DCI format may be employed forthe UE to select at least one of one or more configured SRS resourcesets. An SRS trigger type 0 may refer to an SRS triggered based on ahigher layer signaling. An SRS trigger type 1 may refer to an SRStriggered based on one or more DCI formats. In an example, when PUSCHand SRS are transmitted in a same slot, the UE may be configured totransmit SRS after a transmission of a PUSCH and a corresponding uplinkDMRS.

The base station may semi-statically configure the UE with one or moreSRS configuration parameters indicating at least one of following: a SRSresource configuration identifier; a number of SRS ports; time domainbehavior of an SRS resource configuration (e.g., an indication ofperiodic, semi-persistent, or aperiodic SRS); slot, mini-slot, and/orsubframe level periodicity; offset for a periodic and/or an aperiodicSRS resource; a number of OFDM symbols in an SRS resource; a startingOFDM symbol of an SRS resource; an SRS bandwidth; a frequency hoppingbandwidth; a cyclic shift; and/or an SRS sequence ID.

An antenna port is defined such that the channel over which a symbol onthe antenna port is conveyed can be inferred from the channel over whichanother symbol on the same antenna port is conveyed. If a first symboland a second symbol are transmitted on the same antenna port, thereceiver may infer the channel (e.g., fading gain, multipath delay,and/or the like) for conveying the second symbol on the antenna port,from the channel for conveying the first symbol on the antenna port. Afirst antenna port and a second antenna port may be referred to as quasico-located (QCLed) if one or more large-scale properties of the channelover which a first symbol on the first antenna port is conveyed may beinferred from the channel over which a second symbol on a second antennaport is conveyed. The one or more large-scale properties may comprise atleast one of: a delay spread; a Doppler spread; a Doppler shift; anaverage gain; an average delay; and/or spatial Receiving (Rx)parameters.

Channels that use beamforming require beam management. Beam managementmay comprise beam measurement, beam selection, and beam indication. Abeam may be associated with one or more reference signals. For example,a beam may be identified by one or more beamformed reference signals.The UE may perform downlink beam measurement based on downlink referencesignals (e.g., a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS))and generate a beam measurement report. The UE may perform the downlinkbeam measurement procedure after an RRC connection is set up with a basestation.

FIG. 11B illustrates an example of channel state information referencesignals (CSI-RSs) that are mapped in the time and frequency domains. Asquare shown in FIG. 11B may span a resource block (RB) within abandwidth of a cell. A base station may transmit one or more RRCmessages comprising CSI-RS resource configuration parameters indicatingone or more CSI-RS s. One or more of the following parameters may beconfigured by higher layer signaling (e.g., RRC and/or MAC signaling)for a CSI-RS resource configuration: a CSI-RS resource configurationidentity, a number of CSI-RS ports, a CSI-RS configuration (e.g., symboland resource element (RE) locations in a subframe), a CSI-RS subframeconfiguration (e.g., subframe location, offset, and periodicity in aradio frame), a CSI-RS power parameter, a CSI-RS sequence parameter, acode division multiplexing (CDM) type parameter, a frequency density, atransmission comb, quasi co-location (QCL) parameters (e.g.,QCL-scramblingidentity, crs-portscount, mbsfn-subframeconfiglist,csi-rs-configZPid, qcl-csi-rs-configNZPid), and/or other radio resourceparameters.

The three beams illustrated in FIG. 11B may be configured for a UE in aUE-specific configuration. Three beams are illustrated in FIG. 11B (beam#1, beam #2, and beam #3), more or fewer beams may be configured. Beam#1 may be allocated with CSI-RS 1101 that may be transmitted in one ormore subcarriers in an RB of a first symbol. Beam #2 may be allocatedwith CSI-RS 1102 that may be transmitted in one or more subcarriers inan RB of a second symbol. Beam #3 may be allocated with CSI-RS 1103 thatmay be transmitted in one or more subcarriers in an RB of a thirdsymbol. By using frequency division multiplexing (FDM), a base stationmay use other subcarriers in a same RB (for example, those that are notused to transmit CSI-RS 1101) to transmit another CSI-RS associated witha beam for another UE. By using time domain multiplexing (TDM), beamsused for the UE may be configured such that beams for the UE use symbolsfrom beams of other UEs.

CSI-RS s such as those illustrated in FIG. 11B (e.g., CSI-RS 1101, 1102,1103) may be transmitted by the base station and used by the UE for oneor more measurements. For example, the UE may measure a reference signalreceived power (RSRP) of configured CSI-RS resources. The base stationmay configure the UE with a reporting configuration and the UE mayreport the RSRP measurements to a network (for example, via one or morebase stations) based on the reporting configuration. In an example, thebase station may determine, based on the reported measurement results,one or more transmission configuration indication (TCI) statescomprising a number of reference signals. In an example, the basestation may indicate one or more TCI states to the UE (e.g., via RRCsignaling, a MAC CE, and/or a DCI). The UE may receive a downlinktransmission with a receive (Rx) beam determined based on the one ormore TCI states. In an example, the UE may or may not have a capabilityof beam correspondence. If the UE has the capability of beamcorrespondence, the UE may determine a spatial domain filter of atransmit (Tx) beam based on a spatial domain filter of the correspondingRx beam. If the UE does not have the capability of beam correspondence,the UE may perform an uplink beam selection procedure to determine thespatial domain filter of the Tx beam. The UE may perform the uplink beamselection procedure based on one or more sounding reference signal (SRS)resources configured to the UE by the base station. The base station mayselect and indicate uplink beams for the UE based on measurements of theone or more SRS resources transmitted by the UE.

In a beam management procedure, a UE may assess (e.g., measure) achannel quality of one or more beam pair links, a beam pair linkcomprising a transmitting beam transmitted by a base station and areceiving beam received by the UE. Based on the assessment, the UE maytransmit a beam measurement report indicating one or more beam pairquality parameters comprising, e.g., one or more beam identifications(e.g., a beam index, a reference signal index, or the like), RSRP, aprecoding matrix indicator (PMI), a channel quality indicator (CQI),and/or a rank indicator (RI).

FIG. 12A illustrates examples of three downlink beam managementprocedures: P1, P2, and P3. Procedure P1 may enable a UE measurement ontransmit (Tx) beams of a transmission reception point (TRP) (or multipleTRPs), e.g., to support a selection of one or more base station Tx beamsand/or UE Rx beams (shown as ovals in the top row and bottom row,respectively, of P1). Beamforming at a TRP may comprise a Tx beam sweepfor a set of beams (shown, in the top rows of P1 and P2, as ovalsrotated in a counter-clockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrow).Beamforming at a UE may comprise an Rx beam sweep for a set of beams(shown, in the bottom rows of P1 and P3, as ovals rotated in a clockwisedirection indicated by the dashed arrow). Procedure P2 may be used toenable a UE measurement on Tx beams of a TRP (shown, in the top row ofP2, as ovals rotated in a counter-clockwise direction indicated by thedashed arrow). The UE and/or the base station may perform procedure P2using a smaller set of beams than is used in procedure P1, or usingnarrower beams than the beams used in procedure P1. This may be referredto as beam refinement. The UE may perform procedure P3 for Rx beamdetermination by using the same Tx beam at the base station and sweepingan Rx beam at the UE.

FIG. 12B illustrates examples of three uplink beam managementprocedures: U1, U2, and U3. Procedure U1 may be used to enable a basestation to perform a measurement on Tx beams of a UE, e.g., to support aselection of one or more UE Tx beams and/or base station Rx beams (shownas ovals in the top row and bottom row, respectively, of U1).Beamforming at the UE may include, e.g., a Tx beam sweep from a set ofbeams (shown in the bottom rows of U1 and U3 as ovals rotated in aclockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrow). Beamforming at thebase station may include, e.g., an Rx beam sweep from a set of beams(shown, in the top rows of U1 and U2, as ovals rotated in acounter-clockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrow). Procedure U2may be used to enable the base station to adjust its Rx beam when the UEuses a fixed Tx beam. The UE and/or the base station may performprocedure U2 using a smaller set of beams than is used in procedure P1,or using narrower beams than the beams used in procedure P1. This may bereferred to as beam refinement The UE may perform procedure U3 to adjustits Tx beam when the base station uses a fixed Rx beam.

A UE may initiate a beam failure recovery (BFR) procedure based ondetecting a beam failure. The UE may transmit a BFR request (e.g., apreamble, a UCI, an SR, a MAC CE, and/or the like) based on theinitiating of the BFR procedure. The UE may detect the beam failurebased on a determination that a quality of beam pair link(s) of anassociated control channel is unsatisfactory (e.g., having an error ratehigher than an error rate threshold, a received signal power lower thana received signal power threshold, an expiration of a timer, and/or thelike).

The UE may measure a quality of a beam pair link using one or morereference signals (RS s) comprising one or more SS/PBCH blocks, one ormore CSI-RS resources, and/or one or more demodulation reference signals(DMRSs). A quality of the beam pair link may be based on one or more ofa block error rate (BLER), an RSRP value, a signal to interference plusnoise ratio (SINR) value, a reference signal received quality (RSRQ)value, and/or a CSI value measured on RS resources. The base station mayindicate that an RS resource is quasi co-located (QCLed) with one ormore DM-RS s of a channel (e.g., a control channel, a shared datachannel, and/or the like). The RS resource and the one or more DMRSs ofthe channel may be QCLed when the channel characteristics (e.g., Dopplershift, Doppler spread, average delay, delay spread, spatial Rxparameter, fading, and/or the like) from a transmission via the RSresource to the UE are similar or the same as the channelcharacteristics from a transmission via the channel to the UE.

A network (e.g., a gNB and/or an ng-eNB of a network) and/or the UE mayinitiate a random access procedure. A UE in an RRC IDLE state and/or anRRC INACTIVE state may initiate the random access procedure to request aconnection setup to a network. The UE may initiate the random accessprocedure from an RRC CONNECTED state. The UE may initiate the randomaccess procedure to request uplink resources (e.g., for uplinktransmission of an SR when there is no PUCCH resource available) and/oracquire uplink timing (e.g., when uplink synchronization status isnon-synchronized). The UE may initiate the random access procedure torequest one or more system information blocks (SIB s) (e.g., othersystem information such as SIB2, SIB3, and/or the like). The UE mayinitiate the random access procedure for a beam failure recoveryrequest. A network may initiate a random access procedure for a handoverand/or for establishing time alignment for an SCell addition.

FIG. 13A illustrates a four-step contention-based random accessprocedure. Prior to initiation of the procedure, a base station maytransmit a configuration message 1310 to the UE. The procedureillustrated in FIG. 13A comprises transmission of four messages: a Msg 11311, a Msg 2 1312, a Msg 3 1313, and a Msg 4 1314. The Msg 1 1311 mayinclude and/or be referred to as a preamble (or a random accesspreamble). The Msg 2 1312 may include and/or be referred to as a randomaccess response (RAR).

The configuration message 1310 may be transmitted, for example, usingone or more RRC messages. The one or more RRC messages may indicate oneor more random access channel (RACH) parameters to the UE. The one ormore RACH parameters may comprise at least one of following: generalparameters for one or more random access procedures (e.g.,RACH-configGeneral); cell-specific parameters (e.g., RACH-ConfigCommon);and/or dedicated parameters (e.g., RACH-configDedicated). The basestation may broadcast or multicast the one or more RRC messages to oneor more UEs. The one or more RRC messages may be UE-specific (e.g.,dedicated RRC messages transmitted to a UE in an RRC CONNECTED stateand/or in an RRC INACTIVE state). The UE may determine, based on the oneor more RACH parameters, a time-frequency resource and/or an uplinktransmit power for transmission of the Msg 1 1311 and/or the Msg 3 1313.Based on the one or more RACH parameters, the UE may determine areception timing and a downlink channel for receiving the Msg 2 1312 andthe Msg 4 1314.

The one or more RACH parameters provided in the configuration message1310 may indicate one or more Physical RACH (PRACH) occasions availablefor transmission of the Msg 1 1311. The one or more PRACH occasions maybe predefined. The one or more RACH parameters may indicate one or moreavailable sets of one or more PRACH occasions (e.g., prach-Configlndex).The one or more RACH parameters may indicate an association between (a)one or more PRACH occasions and (b) one or more reference signals. Theone or more RACH parameters may indicate an association between (a) oneor more preambles and (b) one or more reference signals. The one or morereference signals may be SS/PBCH blocks and/or CSIRS s. For example, theone or more RACH parameters may indicate a number of SS/PBCH blocksmapped to a PRACH occasion and/or a number of preambles mapped to aSS/PBCH blocks.

The one or more RACH parameters provided in the configuration message1310 may be used to determine an uplink transmit power of Msg 1 1311and/or Msg 3 1313. For example, the one or more RACH parameters mayindicate a reference power for a preamble transmission (e.g., a receivedtarget power and/or an initial power of the preamble transmission).There may be one or more power offsets indicated by the one or more RACHparameters. For example, the one or more RACH parameters may indicate: apower ramping step; a power offset between SSB and CSI-RS; a poweroffset between transmissions of the Msg 1 1311 and the Msg 3 1313;and/or a power offset value between preamble groups. The one or moreRACH parameters may indicate one or more thresholds based on which theUE may determine at least one reference signal (e.g., an SSB and/orCSI-RS) and/or an uplink carrier (e.g., a normal uplink (NUL) carrierand/or a supplemental uplink (SUL) carrier).

The Msg 1 1311 may include one or more preamble transmissions (e.g., apreamble transmission and one or more preamble retransmissions). An RRCmessage may be used to configure one or more preamble groups (e.g.,group A and/or group B). A preamble group may comprise one or morepreambles. The UE may determine the preamble group based on a pathlossmeasurement and/or a size of the Msg 3 1313. The UE may measure an RSRPof one or more reference signals (e.g., SSBs and/or CSI-RS s) anddetermine at least one reference signal having an RSRP above an RSRPthreshold (e.g., rsrp-ThresholdSSB and/or rsrp-ThresholdCSl-RS). The UEmay select at least one preamble associated with the one or morereference signals and/or a selected preamble group, for example, if theassociation between the one or more preambles and the at least onereference signal is configured by an RRC message.

The UE may determine the preamble based on the one or more RACHparameters provided in the configuration message 1310. For example, theUE may determine the preamble based on a pathloss measurement, an RSRPmeasurement, and/or a size of the Msg 3 1313. As another example, theone or more RACH parameters may indicate: a preamble format; a maximumnumber of preamble transmissions; and/or one or more thresholds fordetermining one or more preamble groups (e.g., group A and group B). Abase station may use the one or more RACH parameters to configure the UEwith an association between one or more preambles and one or morereference signals (e.g., SSBs and/or CSI-RSs). If the association isconfigured, the UE may determine the preamble to include in Msg 1 1311based on the association. The Msg 1 1311 may be transmitted to the basestation via one or more PRACH occasions. The UE may use one or morereference signals (e.g., SSBs and/or CSI-RSs) for selection of thepreamble and for determining of the PRACH occasion. One or more RACHparameters (e.g., ra-ssb-OccasionMsklndex and/or ra-OccasionList) mayindicate an association between the PRACH occasions and the one or morereference signals.

The UE may perform a preamble retransmission if no response is receivedfollowing a preamble transmission. The UE may increase an uplinktransmit power for the preamble retransmission. The UE may select aninitial preamble transmit power based on a pathloss measurement and/or atarget received preamble power configured by the network. The UE maydetermine to retransmit a preamble and may ramp up the uplink transmitpower. The UE may receive one or more RACH parameters (e.g., PREAMBLEPOWER RAMPING STEP) indicating a ramping step for the preambleretransmission. The ramping step may be an amount of incrementalincrease in uplink transmit power for a retransmission. The UE may rampup the uplink transmit power if the UE determines a reference signal(e.g., SSB and/or CSI-RS) that is the same as a previous preambletransmission. The UE may count a number of preamble transmissions and/orretransmissions (e.g., PREAMBLE_TRANSMISSION_COUNTER). The UE maydetermine that a random access procedure completed unsuccessfully, forexample, if the number of preamble transmissions exceeds a thresholdconfigured by the one or more RACH parameters (e.g., preambleTransMax).

The Msg 2 1312 received by the UE may include an RAR. In some scenarios,the Msg 2 1312 may include multiple RARs corresponding to multiple UEs.The Msg 2 1312 may be received after or in response to the transmittingof the Msg 1 1311. The Msg 2 1312 may be scheduled on the DLSCH andindicated on a PDCCH using a random access RNTI (RARNTI). The Msg 2 1312may indicate that the Msg 1 1311 was received by the base station. TheMsg 2 1312 may include a time-alignment command that may be used by theUE to adjust the UE's transmission timing, a scheduling grant fortransmission of the Msg 3 1313, and/or a Temporary Cell RNTI (TC-RNTI).After transmitting a preamble, the UE may start a time window (e.g.,ra-ResponseWindow) to monitor a PDCCH for the Msg 2 1312. The UE maydetermine when to start the time window based on a PRACH occasion thatthe UE uses to transmit the preamble. For example, the UE may start thetime window one or more symbols after a last symbol of the preamble(e.g., at a first PDCCH occasion from an end of a preambletransmission). The one or more symbols may be determined based on anumerology. The PDCCH may be in a common search space (e.g., aType1-PDCCH common search space) configured by an RRC message. The UEmay identify the RAR based on a Radio Network Temporary Identifier(RNTI). RNTIs may be used depending on one or more events initiating therandom access procedure. The UE may use random access RNTI (RA-RNTI).The RA-RNTI may be associated with PRACH occasions in which the UEtransmits a preamble. For example, the UE may determine the RA-RNTIbased on: an OFDM symbol index; a slot index; a frequency domain index;and/or a UL carrier indicator of the PRACH occasions. An example ofRA-RNTI may be as follows:

RA-RNTI=1+s_id+14×t_id+14×80×f_id+14×80×8×ul_carrier_id where s_id maybe an index of a first OFDM symbol of the PRACH occasion (e.g.,0≤s_id<14), t_id may be an index of a first slot of the PRACH occasionin a system frame (e.g., 0≤t_id<80), f_id may be an index of the PRACHoccasion in the frequency domain (e.g., 0≤f_id<8), and ul_carrier_id maybe a UL carrier used for a preamble transmission (e.g., 0 for an NULcarrier, and 1 for an SUL carrier).

The UE may transmit the Msg 3 1313 in response to a successful receptionof the Msg 2 1312 (e.g., using resources identified in the Msg 2 1312).The Msg 3 1313 may be used for contention resolution in, for example,the contention-based random access procedure illustrated in FIG. 13A. Insome scenarios, a plurality of UEs may transmit a same preamble to abase station and the base station may provide an RAR that corresponds toa UE. Collisions may occur if the plurality of UEs interpret the RAR ascorresponding to themselves. Contention resolution (e.g., using the Msg3 1313 and the Msg 4 1314) may be used to increase the likelihood thatthe UE does not incorrectly use an identity of another the UE. Toperform contention resolution, the UE may include a device identifier inthe Msg 3 1313 (e.g., a C-RNTI if assigned, a TC RNTI included in theMsg 2 1312, and/or any other suitable identifier).

The Msg 4 1314 may be received after or in response to the transmittingof the Msg 3 1313. If a CRNTI was included in the Msg 3 1313, the basestation will address the UE on the PDCCH using the CRNTI. If the UE'sunique CRNTI is detected on the PDCCH, the random access procedure isdetermined to be successfully completed. If a TCRNTI is included in theMsg 3 1313 (e.g., if the UE is in an RRC_IDLE state or not otherwiseconnected to the base station), Msg 4 1314 will be received using aDL-SCH associated with the TCRNTI. If a MAC PDU is successfully decodedand a MAC PDU comprises the UE contention resolution identity MAC CEthat matches or otherwise corresponds with the CCCH SDU sent (e.g.,transmitted) in Msg 3 1313, the UE may determine that the contentionresolution is successful and/or the UE may determine that the randomaccess procedure is successfully completed.

The UE may be configured with a supplementary uplink (SUL) carrier and anormal uplink (NUL) carrier. An initial access (e.g., random accessprocedure) may be supported in an uplink carrier. For example, a basestation may configure the UE with two separate RACH configurations: onefor an SUL carrier and the other for an NUL carrier. For random accessin a cell configured with an SUL carrier, the network may indicate whichcarrier to use (NUL or SUL). The UE may determine the SUL carrier, forexample, if a measured quality of one or more reference signals is lowerthan a broadcast threshold. Uplink transmissions of the random accessprocedure (e.g., the Msg 1 1311 and/or the Msg 3 1313) may remain on theselected carrier. The UE may switch an uplink carrier during the randomaccess procedure (e.g., between the Msg 1 1311 and the Msg 3 1313) inone or more cases. For example, the UE may determine and/or switch anuplink carrier for the Msg 1 1311 and/or the Msg 3 1313 based on achannel clear assessment (e.g., a listen-before-talk).

FIG. 13B illustrates a two-step contention-free random access procedure.Similar to the four-step contention-based random access procedureillustrated in FIG. 13A, a base station may, prior to initiation of theprocedure, transmit a configuration message 1320 to the UE. Theconfiguration message 1320 may be analogous in some respects to theconfiguration message 1310. The procedure illustrated in FIG. 13Bcomprises transmission of two messages: a Msg 1 1321 and a Msg 2 1322.The Msg 1 1321 and the Msg 2 1322 may be analogous in some respects tothe Msg 1 1311 and a Msg 2 1312 illustrated in FIG. 13A, respectively.As will be understood from FIGS. 13A and 13B, the contention-free randomaccess procedure may not include messages analogous to the Msg 3 1313and/or the Msg 4 1314.

The contention-free random access procedure illustrated in FIG. 13B maybe initiated for a beam failure recovery, other SI request, SCelladdition, and/or handover. For example, a base station may indicate orassign to the UE the preamble to be used for the Msg 1 1321. The UE mayreceive, from the base station via PDCCH and/or RRC, an indication of apreamble (e.g., ra-Preamblelndex).

After transmitting a preamble, the UE may start a time window (e.g.,ra-ResponseWindow) to monitor a PDCCH for the RAR. In the event of abeam failure recovery request, the base station may configure the UEwith a separate time window and/or a separate PDCCH in a search spaceindicated by an RRC message (e.g., recoverySearchSpaceId). The UE maymonitor for a PDCCH transmission addressed to a Cell RNTI (C-RNTI) onthe search space. In the contention-free random access procedureillustrated in FIG. 13B, the UE may determine that a random accessprocedure successfully completes after or in response to transmission ofMsg 1 1321 and reception of a corresponding Msg 2 1322. The UE maydetermine that a random access procedure successfully completes, forexample, if a PDCCH transmission is addressed to a CRNTI. The UE maydetermine that a random access procedure successfully completes, forexample, if the UE receives an RAR comprising a preamble identifiercorresponding to a preamble transmitted by the UE and/or the RARcomprises a MAC sub-PDU with the preamble identifier. The UE maydetermine the response as an indication of an acknowledgement for an SIrequest.

FIG. 13C illustrates another two-step random access procedure. Similarto the random access procedures illustrated in FIGS. 13A and 13B, a basestation may, prior to initiation of the procedure, transmit aconfiguration message 1330 to the UE. The configuration message 1330 maybe analogous in some respects to the configuration message 1310 and/orthe configuration message 1320. The procedure illustrated in FIG. 13Ccomprises transmission of two messages: a Msg A 1331 and a Msg B 1332.

Msg A 1331 may be transmitted in an uplink transmission by the UE. Msg A1331 may comprise one or more transmissions of a preamble 1341 and/orone or more transmissions of a transport block 1342. The transport block1342 may comprise contents that are similar and/or equivalent to thecontents of the Msg 3 1313 illustrated in FIG. 13A. The transport block1342 may comprise UCI (e.g., an SR, a HARQ ACK/NACK, and/or the like).The UE may receive the Msg B 1332 after or in response to transmittingthe Msg A 1331. The Msg B 1332 may comprise contents that are similarand/or equivalent to the contents of the Msg 2 1312 (e.g., an RAR)illustrated in FIGS. 13A and 13B and/or the Msg 4 1314 illustrated inFIG. 13A.

The UE may initiate the two-step random access procedure in FIG. 13C forlicensed spectrum and/or unlicensed spectrum. The UE may determine,based on one or more factors, whether to initiate the two-step randomaccess procedure. The one or more factors may be: a radio accesstechnology in use (e.g., LTE, NR, and/or the like); whether the UE hasvalid TA or not; a cell size; the UE's RRC state; a type of spectrum(e.g., licensed vs. unlicensed); and/or any other suitable factors.

The UE may determine, based on two-step RACH parameters included in theconfiguration message 1330, a radio resource and/or an uplink transmitpower for the preamble 1341 and/or the transport block 1342 included inthe Msg A 1331. The RACH parameters may indicate a modulation and codingschemes (MCS), a time-frequency resource, and/or a power control for thepreamble 1341 and/or the transport block 1342. A time-frequency resourcefor transmission of the preamble 1341 (e.g., a PRACH) and atime-frequency resource for transmission of the transport block 1342(e.g., a PUSCH) may be multiplexed using FDM, TDM, and/or CDM. The RACHparameters may enable the UE to determine a reception timing and adownlink channel for monitoring for and/or receiving Msg B 1332.

The transport block 1342 may comprise data (e.g., delay-sensitive data),an identifier of the UE, security information, and/or device information(e.g., an International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI)). The basestation may transmit the Msg B 1332 as a response to the Msg A 1331. TheMsg B 1332 may comprise at least one of following: a preambleidentifier; a timing advance command; a power control command; an uplinkgrant (e.g., a radio resource assignment and/or an MCS); a UE identifierfor contention resolution; and/or an RNTI (e.g., a C-RNTI or a TC-RNTI).The UE may determine that the two-step random access procedure issuccessfully completed if: a preamble identifier in the Msg B 1332 ismatched to a preamble transmitted by the UE; and/or the identifier ofthe UE in Msg B 1332 is matched to the identifier of the UE in the Msg A1331 (e.g., the transport block 1342).

A UE and a base station may exchange control signaling. The controlsignaling may be referred to as L1/L2 control signaling and mayoriginate from the PHY layer (e.g., layer 1) and/or the MAC layer (e.g.,layer 2). The control signaling may comprise downlink control signalingtransmitted from the base station to the UE and/or uplink controlsignaling transmitted from the UE to the base station.

The downlink control signaling may comprise: a downlink schedulingassignment; an uplink scheduling grant indicating uplink radio resourcesand/or a transport format; a slot format information; a preemptionindication; a power control command; and/or any other suitablesignaling. The UE may receive the downlink control signaling in apayload transmitted by the base station on a physical downlink controlchannel (PDCCH). The payload transmitted on the PDCCH may be referred toas downlink control information (DCI). In some scenarios, the PDCCH maybe a group common PDCCH (GC-PDCCH) that is common to a group of UEs.

A base station may attach one or more cyclic redundancy check (CRC)parity bits to a DCI in order to facilitate detection of transmissionerrors. When the DCI is intended for a UE (or a group of the UEs), thebase station may scramble the CRC parity bits with an identifier of theUE (or an identifier of the group of the UEs). Scrambling the CRC paritybits with the identifier may comprise Modulo-2 addition (or an exclusiveOR operation) of the identifier value and the CRC parity bits. Theidentifier may comprise a 16-bit value of a radio network temporaryidentifier (RNTI).

DCIs may be used for different purposes. A purpose may be indicated bythe type of RNTI used to scramble the CRC parity bits. For example, aDCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a paging RNTI (P-RNTI) mayindicate paging information and/or a system information changenotification. The P-RNTI may be predefined as “FFFE” in hexadecimal. ADCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a system information RNTI(SI-RNTI) may indicate a broadcast transmission of the systeminformation. The SI-RNTI may be predefined as “FFFF” in hexadecimal. ADCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a random access RNTI (RA-RNTI)may indicate a random access response (RAR). A DCI having CRC paritybits scrambled with a cell RNTI (C-RNTI) may indicate a dynamicallyscheduled unicast transmission and/or a triggering of PDCCH-orderedrandom access. A DCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a temporarycell RNTI (TC-RNTI) may indicate a contention resolution (e.g., a Msg 3analogous to the Msg 3 1313 illustrated in FIG. 13A). Other RNTIsconfigured to the UE by a base station may comprise a ConfiguredScheduling RNTI (CS-RNTI), a Transmit Power Control-PUCCH RNTI(TPC-PUCCH-RNTI), a Transmit Power Control-PUSCH RNTI (TPC-PUSCH-RNTI),a Transmit Power Control-SRS RNTI (TPC-SRS-RNTI), an Interruption RNTI(INT-RNTI), a Slot Format Indication RNTI (SFI-RNTI), a Semi-PersistentCSI RNTI (SP-CSI-RNTI), a Modulation and Coding Scheme Cell RNTI(MCS-C-RNTI), and/or the like.

Depending on the purpose and/or content of a DCI, the base station maytransmit the DCIs with one or more DCI formats. For example, DCI format0_0 may be used for scheduling of PUSCH in a cell. DCI format 0_0 may bea fallback DCI format (e.g., with compact DCI payloads). DCI format 0_1may be used for scheduling of PUSCH in a cell (e.g., with more DCIpayloads than DCI format 0_0). DCI format 1_0 may be used for schedulingof PDSCH in a cell. DCI format 1_0 may be a fallback DCI format (e.g.,with compact DCI payloads). DCI format 1_1 may be used for scheduling ofPDSCH in a cell (e.g., with more DCI payloads than DCI format 1_0). DCIformat 2_0 may be used for providing a slot format indication to a groupof UEs. DCI format 2_1 may be used for notifying a group of UEs of aphysical resource block and/or OFDM symbol where the UE may assume notransmission is intended to the UE. DCI format 2_2 may be used fortransmission of a transmit power control (TPC) command for PUCCH orPUSCH. DCI format 2_3 may be used for transmission of a group of TPCcommands for SRS transmissions by one or more UEs. DCI format(s) for newfunctions may be defined in future releases. DCI formats may havedifferent DCI sizes, or may share the same DCI size.

After scrambling a DCI with a RNTI, the base station may process the DCIwith channel coding (e.g., polar coding), rate matching, scramblingand/or QPSK modulation. A base station may map the coded and modulatedDCI on resource elements used and/or configured for a PDCCH. Based on apayload size of the DCI and/or a coverage of the base station, the basestation may transmit the DCI via a PDCCH occupying a number ofcontiguous control channel elements (CCEs). The number of the contiguousCCEs (referred to as aggregation level) may be 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, and/orany other suitable number. A CCE may comprise a number (e.g., 6) ofresource-element groups (REGs). A REG may comprise a resource block inan OFDM symbol. The mapping of the coded and modulated DCI on theresource elements may be based on mapping of CCEs and REGs (e.g.,CCE-to-REG mapping).

FIG. 14A illustrates an example of CORESET configurations for abandwidth part. The base station may transmit a DCI via a PDCCH on oneor more control resource sets (CORESETs). A CORESET may comprise atime-frequency resource in which the UE tries to decode a DCI using oneor more search spaces. The base station may configure a CORESET in thetime-frequency domain. In the example of FIG. 14A, a first CORESET 1401and a second CORESET 1402 occur at the first symbol in a slot. The firstCORESET 1401 overlaps with the second CORESET 1402 in the frequencydomain. A third CORESET 1403 occurs at a third symbol in the slot. Afourth CORESET 1404 occurs at the seventh symbol in the slot. CORESETsmay have a different number of resource blocks in frequency domain.

FIG. 14B illustrates an example of a CCE-to-REG mapping for DCItransmission on a CORESET and PDCCH processing. The CCE-to-REG mappingmay be an interleaved mapping (e.g., for the purpose of providingfrequency diversity) or a non-interleaved mapping (e.g., for thepurposes of facilitating interference coordination and/orfrequency-selective transmission of control channels). The base stationmay perform different or same CCE-to-REG mapping on different CORESETs.A CORESET may be associated with a CCE-to-REG mapping by RRCconfiguration. A CORESET may be configured with an antenna port quasico-location (QCL) parameter. The antenna port QCL parameter may indicateQCL information of a demodulation reference signal (DMRS) for PDCCHreception in the CORESET.

The base station may transmit, to the UE, RRC messages comprisingconfiguration parameters of one or more CORESETs and one or more searchspace sets. The configuration parameters may indicate an associationbetween a search space set and a CORESET. A search space set maycomprise a set of PDCCH candidates formed by CCEs at a given aggregationlevel. The configuration parameters may indicate: a number of PDCCHcandidates to be monitored per aggregation level; a PDCCH monitoringperiodicity and a PDCCH monitoring pattern; one or more DCI formats tobe monitored by the UE; and/or whether a search space set is a commonsearch space set or a UE-specific search space set. A set of CCEs in thecommon search space set may be predefined and known to the UE. A set ofCCEs in the UE-specific search space set may be configured based on theUE's identity (e.g., C-RNTI).

As shown in FIG. 14B, the UE may determine a time-frequency resource fora CORESET based on RRC messages. The UE may determine a CCE-to-REGmapping (e.g., interleaved or non-interleaved, and/or mappingparameters) for the CORESET based on configuration parameters of theCORESET. The UE may determine a number (e.g., at most 10) of searchspace sets configured on the CORESET based on the RRC messages. The UEmay monitor a set of PDCCH candidates according to configurationparameters of a search space set. The UE may monitor a set of PDCCHcandidates in one or more CORESETs for detecting one or more DCIs.Monitoring may comprise decoding one or more PDCCH candidates of the setof the PDCCH candidates according to the monitored DCI formats.Monitoring may comprise decoding a DCI content of one or more PDCCHcandidates with possible (or configured) PDCCH locations, possible (orconfigured) PDCCH formats (e.g., number of CCEs, number of PDCCHcandidates in common search spaces, and/or number of PDCCH candidates inthe UE-specific search spaces) and possible (or configured) DCI formats.The decoding may be referred to as blind decoding. The UE may determinea DCI as valid for the UE, in response to CRC checking (e.g., scrambledbits for CRC parity bits of the DCI matching a RNTI value). The UE mayprocess information contained in the DCI (e.g., a scheduling assignment,an uplink grant, power control, a slot format indication, a downlinkpreemption, and/or the like).

The UE may transmit uplink control signaling (e.g., uplink controlinformation (UCI)) to a base station. The uplink control signaling maycomprise hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) acknowledgements forreceived DL-SCH transport blocks. The UE may transmit the HARQacknowledgements after receiving a DL-SCH transport block. Uplinkcontrol signaling may comprise channel state information (CSI)indicating channel quality of a physical downlink channel. The UE maytransmit the CSI to the base station. The base station, based on thereceived CSI, may determine transmission format parameters (e.g.,comprising multi-antenna and beamforming schemes) for a downlinktransmission. Uplink control signaling may comprise scheduling requests(SR). The UE may transmit an SR indicating that uplink data is availablefor transmission to the base station. The UE may transmit a UCI (e.g.,HARQ acknowledgements (HARQ-ACK), CSI report, SR, and the like) via aphysical uplink control channel (PUCCH) or a physical uplink sharedchannel (PUSCH). The UE may transmit the uplink control signaling via aPUCCH using one of several PUCCH formats.

There may be five PUCCH formats and the UE may determine a PUCCH formatbased on a size of the UCI (e.g., a number of uplink symbols of UCItransmission and a number of UCI bits). PUCCH format 0 may have a lengthof one or two OFDM symbols and may include two or fewer bits. The UE maytransmit UCI in a PUCCH resource using PUCCH format 0 if thetransmission is over one or two symbols and the number of HARQ-ACKinformation bits with positive or negative SR (HARQ-ACK/SR bits) is oneor two. PUCCH format 1 may occupy a number between four and fourteenOFDM symbols and may include two or fewer bits. The UE may use PUCCHformat 1 if the transmission is four or more symbols and the number ofHARQ-ACK/SR bits is one or two. PUCCH format 2 may occupy one or twoOFDM symbols and may include more than two bits. The UE may use PUCCHformat 2 if the transmission is over one or two symbols and the numberof UCI bits is two or more. PUCCH format 3 may occupy a number betweenfour and fourteen OFDM symbols and may include more than two bits. TheUE may use PUCCH format 3 if the transmission is four or more symbols,the number of UCI bits is two or more and PUCCH resource does notinclude an orthogonal cover code. PUCCH format 4 may occupy a numberbetween four and fourteen OFDM symbols and may include more than twobits. The UE may use PUCCH format 4 if the transmission is four or moresymbols, the number of UCI bits is two or more and the PUCCH resourceincludes an orthogonal cover code.

The base station may transmit configuration parameters to the UE for aplurality of PUCCH resource sets using, for example, an RRC message. Theplurality of PUCCH resource sets (e.g., up to four sets) may beconfigured on an uplink BWP of a cell. A PUCCH resource set may beconfigured with a PUCCH resource set index, a plurality of PUCCHresources with a PUCCH resource being identified by a PUCCH resourceidentifier (e.g., pucch-Resourceid), and/or a number (e.g. a maximumnumber) of UCI information bits the UE may transmit using one of theplurality of PUCCH resources in the PUCCH resource set. When configuredwith a plurality of PUCCH resource sets, the UE may select one of theplurality of PUCCH resource sets based on a total bit length of the UCIinformation bits (e.g., HARQ-ACK, SR, and/or CSI). If the total bitlength of UCI information bits is two or fewer, the UE may select afirst PUCCH resource set having a PUCCH resource set index equal to “0”.If the total bit length of UCI information bits is greater than two andless than or equal to a first configured value, the UE may select asecond PUCCH resource set having a PUCCH resource set index equal to“1”. If the total bit length of UCI information bits is greater than thefirst configured value and less than or equal to a second configuredvalue, the UE may select a third PUCCH resource set having a PUCCHresource set index equal to “2”. If the total bit length of UCIinformation bits is greater than the second configured value and lessthan or equal to a third value (e.g., 1406), the UE may select a fourthPUCCH resource set having a PUCCH resource set index equal to “3”.

After determining a PUCCH resource set from a plurality of PUCCHresource sets, the UE may determine a PUCCH resource from the PUCCHresource set for UCI (HARQ-ACK, CSI, and/or SR) transmission. The UE maydetermine the PUCCH resource based on a PUCCH resource indicator in aDCI (e.g., with a DCI format 1_0 or DCI for 1_1) received on a PDCCH. Athree-bit PUCCH resource indicator in the DCI may indicate one of eightPUCCH resources in the PUCCH resource set. Based on the PUCCH resourceindicator, the UE may transmit the UCI (HARQ-ACK, CSI and/or SR) using aPUCCH resource indicated by the PUCCH resource indicator in the DCI.

FIG. 15 illustrates an example of a wireless device 1502 incommunication with a base station 1504 in accordance with embodiments ofthe present disclosure. The wireless device 1502 and base station 1504may be part of a mobile communication network, such as the mobilecommunication network 100 illustrated in FIG. 1A, the mobilecommunication network 150 illustrated in FIG. 1B, or any othercommunication network. Only one wireless device 1502 and one basestation 1504 are illustrated in FIG. 15, but it will be understood thata mobile communication network may include more than one UE and/or morethan one base station, with the same or similar configuration as thoseshown in FIG. 15.

The base station 1504 may connect the wireless device 1502 to a corenetwork (not shown) through radio communications over the air interface(or radio interface) 1506. The communication direction from the basestation 1504 to the wireless device 1502 over the air interface 1506 isknown as the downlink, and the communication direction from the wirelessdevice 1502 to the base station 1504 over the air interface is known asthe uplink. Downlink transmissions may be separated from uplinktransmissions using FDD, TDD, and/or some combination of the twoduplexing techniques.

In the downlink, data to be sent to the wireless device 1502 from thebase station 1504 may be provided to the processing system 1508 of thebase station 1504. The data may be provided to the processing system1508 by, for example, a core network. In the uplink, data to be sent tothe base station 1504 from the wireless device 1502 may be provided tothe processing system 1518 of the wireless device 1502. The processingsystem 1508 and the processing system 1518 may implement layer 3 andlayer 2 OSI functionality to process the data for transmission. Layer 2may include an SDAP layer, a PDCP layer, an RLC layer, and a MAC layer,for example, with respect to FIG. 2A, FIG. 2B, FIG. 3, and FIG. 4A.Layer 3 may include an RRC layer as with respect to FIG. 2B.

After being processed by processing system 1508, the data to be sent tothe wireless device 1502 may be provided to a transmission processingsystem 1510 of base station 1504. Similarly, after being processed bythe processing system 1518, the data to be sent to base station 1504 maybe provided to a transmission processing system 1520 of the wirelessdevice 1502. The transmission processing system 1510 and thetransmission processing system 1520 may implement layer 1 OSIfunctionality. Layer 1 may include a PHY layer with respect to FIG. 2A,FIG. 2B, FIG. 3, and FIG. 4A. For transmit processing, the PHY layer mayperform, for example, forward error correction coding of transportchannels, interleaving, rate matching, mapping of transport channels tophysical channels, modulation of physical channel, multiple-inputmultiple-output (MIMO) or multi-antenna processing, and/or the like.

At the base station 1504, a reception processing system 1512 may receivethe uplink transmission from the wireless device 1502. At the wirelessdevice 1502, a reception processing system 1522 may receive the downlinktransmission from base station 1504. The reception processing system1512 and the reception processing system 1522 may implement layer 1 OSIfunctionality. Layer 1 may include a PHY layer with respect to FIG. 2A,FIG. 2B, FIG. 3, and FIG. 4A. For receive processing, the PHY layer mayperform, for example, error detection, forward error correctiondecoding, deinterleaving, demapping of transport channels to physicalchannels, demodulation of physical channels, MIMO or multi-antennaprocessing, and/or the like.

As shown in FIG. 15, a wireless device 1502 and the base station 1504may include multiple antennas. The multiple antennas may be used toperform one or more MIMO or multi-antenna techniques, such as spatialmultiplexing (e.g., single-user MIMO or multi-user MIMO),transmit/receive diversity, and/or beamforming. In other examples, thewireless device 1502 and/or the base station 1504 may have a singleantenna.

The processing system 1508 and the processing system 1518 may beassociated with a memory 1514 and a memory 1524, respectively. Memory1514 and memory 1524 (e.g., one or more non-transitory computer readablemediums) may store computer program instructions or code that may beexecuted by the processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518to carry out one or more of the functionalities discussed in the presentapplication. Although not shown in FIG. 15, the transmission processingsystem 1510, the transmission processing system 1520, the receptionprocessing system 1512, and/or the reception processing system 1522 maybe coupled to a memory (e.g., one or more non-transitory computerreadable mediums) storing computer program instructions or code that maybe executed to carry out one or more of their respectivefunctionalities.

The processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 maycomprise one or more controllers and/or one or more processors. The oneor more controllers and/or one or more processors may comprise, forexample, a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP),a microcontroller, an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), afield programmable gate array (FPGA) and/or other programmable logicdevice, discrete gate and/or transistor logic, discrete hardwarecomponents, an on-board unit, or any combination thereof. The processingsystem 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 may perform at least oneof signal coding/processing, data processing, power control,input/output processing, and/or any other functionality that may enablethe wireless device 1502 and the base station 1504 to operate in awireless environment.

The processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 may beconnected to one or more peripherals 1516 and one or more peripherals1526, respectively. The one or more peripherals 1516 and the one or moreperipherals 1526 may include software and/or hardware that providefeatures and/or functionalities, for example, a speaker, a microphone, akeypad, a display, a touchpad, a power source, a satellite transceiver,a universal serial bus (USB) port, a hands-free headset, a frequencymodulated (FM) radio unit, a media player, an Internet browser, anelectronic control unit (e.g., for a motor vehicle), and/or one or moresensors (e.g., an accelerometer, a gyroscope, a temperature sensor, aradar sensor, a lidar sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a light sensor, acamera, and/or the like). The processing system 1508 and/or theprocessing system 1518 may receive user input data from and/or provideuser output data to the one or more peripherals 1516 and/or the one ormore peripherals 1526. The processing system 1518 in the wireless device1502 may receive power from a power source and/or may be configured todistribute the power to the other components in the wireless device1502. The power source may comprise one or more sources of power, forexample, a battery, a solar cell, a fuel cell, or any combinationthereof. The processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518may be connected to a GPS chipset 1517 and a GPS chipset 1527,respectively. The GPS chipset 1517 and the GPS chipset 1527 may beconfigured to provide geographic location information of the wirelessdevice 1502 and the base station 1504, respectively.

FIG. 16A illustrates an example structure for uplink transmission. Abaseband signal representing a physical uplink shared channel mayperform one or more functions. The one or more functions may comprise atleast one of: scrambling; modulation of scrambled bits to generatecomplex-valued symbols; mapping of the complex-valued modulation symbolsonto one or several transmission layers; transform precoding to generatecomplex-valued symbols; precoding of the complex-valued symbols; mappingof precoded complex-valued symbols to resource elements; generation ofcomplex-valued time-domain Single Carrier-Frequency Division MultipleAccess (SC-FDMA) or CP-OFDM signal for an antenna port; and/or the like.In an example, when transform precoding is enabled, a SC-FDMA signal foruplink transmission may be generated. In an example, when transformprecoding is not enabled, an CP-OFDM signal for uplink transmission maybe generated by FIG. 16A. These functions are illustrated as examplesand it is anticipated that other mechanisms may be implemented invarious embodiments.

FIG. 16B illustrates an example structure for modulation andup-conversion of a baseband signal to a carrier frequency. The basebandsignal may be a complex-valued SC-FDMA or CP-OFDM baseband signal for anantenna port and/or a complex-valued Physical Random Access Channel(PRACH) baseband signal. Filtering may be employed prior totransmission.

FIG. 16C illustrates an example structure for downlink transmissions. Abaseband signal representing a physical downlink channel may perform oneor more functions. The one or more functions may comprise: scrambling ofcoded bits in a codeword to be transmitted on a physical channel;modulation of scrambled bits to generate complex-valued modulationsymbols; mapping of the complex-valued modulation symbols onto one orseveral transmission layers; precoding of the complex-valued modulationsymbols on a layer for transmission on the antenna ports; mapping ofcomplex-valued modulation symbols for an antenna port to resourceelements; generation of complex-valued time-domain OFDM signal for anantenna port; and/or the like. These functions are illustrated asexamples and it is anticipated that other mechanisms may be implementedin various embodiments.

FIG. 16D illustrates another example structure for modulation andup-conversion of a baseband signal to a carrier frequency. The basebandsignal may be a complex-valued OFDM baseband signal for an antenna port.Filtering may be employed prior to transmission.

A wireless device may receive from a base station one or more messages(e.g. RRC messages) comprising configuration parameters of a pluralityof cells (e.g. primary cell, secondary cell). The wireless device maycommunicate with at least one base station (e.g. two or more basestations in dual-connectivity) via the plurality of cells. The one ormore messages (e.g. as a part of the configuration parameters) maycomprise parameters of physical, MAC, RLC, PCDP, SDAP, RRC layers forconfiguring the wireless device. For example, the configurationparameters may comprise parameters for configuring physical and MAClayer channels, bearers, etc. For example, the configuration parametersmay comprise parameters indicating values of timers for physical, MAC,RLC, PCDP, SDAP, RRC layers, and/or communication channels.

A timer may begin running once it is started and continue running untilit is stopped or until it expires. A timer may be started if it is notrunning or restarted if it is running. A timer may be associated with avalue (e.g. the timer may be started or restarted from a value or may bestarted from zero and expire once it reaches the value). The duration ofa timer may not be updated until the timer is stopped or expires (e.g.,due to BWP switching). A timer may be used to measure a timeperiod/window for a process. When the specification refers to animplementation and procedure related to one or more timers, it will beunderstood that there are multiple ways to implement the one or moretimers. For example, it will be understood that one or more of themultiple ways to implement a timer may be used to measure a timeperiod/window for the procedure. For example, a random access responsewindow timer may be used for measuring a window of time for receiving arandom access response. In an example, instead of starting and expiry ofa random access response window timer, the time difference between twotime stamps may be used. When a timer is restarted, a process formeasurement of time window may be restarted. Other exampleimplementations may be provided to restart a measurement of a timewindow.

FIG. 17 illustrates example configuration parameters for a wirelessdevice to receive control and/or data from a base station. A wirelessdevice may receive one or more radio resource control (RRC) messagescomprising configuration parameters of a cell. The configurationparameters may comprise one or more parameters of a serving cellconfiguration (e.g., ServingCellConfig). The one or more parameters ofthe serving cell configuration may comprise one or more downlinkbandwidth parts (e.g., a list of BWP-Downlinks). The one or moreparameters of the serving cell configuration may comprise one or moreuplink bandwidth parts (e.g., a list of BWP-Uplinks). A downlinkbandwidth part (e.g., BWP-Downlink) and/or an uplink bandwidth part(e.g., BWP-Uplink) may comprise a bandwidth part index (e.g., bwp-Id),configuration parameters of a cell-common downlink bandwidth part (e.g.,BWP-DownlinkCommon), and/or a UE-specific downlink bandwidth part (e.g.,BWP-DownlinkDedicated). For example, the bandwidth part index (bwp-Id)may indicate a bandwidth part configuration. For example, an index ofthe bandwidth part is the bandwidth part index. The bandwidth partconfiguration may comprise a location and bandwidth information(locationAndBandwidth). The locationAndBandwidth may indicate a startingresource block (RB) of the bandwidth part and a bandwidth of thebandwidth part, based on a reference point (e.g., a pointA of acarrier/cell for the bandwidth part). The bandwidth part configurationmay comprise a subcarrier spacing (e.g., subcarrierSpacing) and a cyclicprefix (e.g., cyclicPrefix). For example, the subcarrier spacing may beone of 15 kHz, 30 kHz, 60 kHz, 120 kHz, 240 kHz, 480 kHz, and 960 kHz.For example, the cyclic prefix may be one of a normal cyclic prefix andan extended cyclic prefix.

Configuration parameters of the cell-specific downlink bandwidth (e.g.,BWP-DownlinkCommon) may indicate/comprise genericParameters,pdcch-ConfigCommon, and/or pdsch-ConfigCommon. For example,pdcch-ConfigCommon may comprise cell-specific parameters for receivingdownlink control information (DCIs) via the cell-specific downlinkbandwidth part (e.g., an initial BWP). For example, pdsch-ConfigCommonmay comprise cell-specific parameters for receiving PDSCHs of transportblocks (TBs) via the cell-specific downlink bandwidth part.Configuration parameters of the UE-specific downlink bandwidth part(e.g., BWP-DownlinkDedicated) may comprise pdcch-Config, pdsch-Config,sps-Config, and/or radioLinkMonitoringConfig (e.g., RLM-Config). Theconfiguration parameters may comprise sps-ConfigList and/orbeamFailureRecoverySCellConfig. For example,beamFailureRecoverySCellConfig may comprise reference signal parametersfor beam failure recovery for secondary cells. For example, pdcch-Configmay comprise parameters for receiving DCIs for the UE-specific downlinkbandwidth part. For example, pdsch-Config may comprise parameters forreceiving PDSCHs of TBs for the UE-specific downlink bandwidth part. Forexample, sps-Config may comprise parameters for receivingsemi-persistent scheduling PDSCHs. The base station may configure a SPSfor a BWP or a list of SPS for the BWP. For example,radioLinkMonitoringConfig may comprise parameters for radio linkmonitoring.

Configuration parameters of pdcch-Config may indicate/comprise at leastone of a set of coresets, a set of search spaces, a downlink preemption(e.g., downlinkPreemption), a transmission power control (TPC) for PUSCH(e.g., tpc-PUSCH), a TPC for PUCCH and/or a TPC for SRS. Theconfiguration parameters may comprise a list of search space switchinggroups (e.g., searchsSpaceSwitchingGroup), a search space switchingtimer (e.g., searchSpaceSwitchingTimer), an uplink cancellation, and/ora monitoring capability configuration (e.g.,monitoringCapabilityConfig). The base station may configure the list ofsearch space switching groups, where the wireless device may switch froma first search space group to a second search space group based on thesearch space switching timer or a rule, an indication, or an event. Thebase station may configure up to K (e.g., K=3) coresets for a BWP of acell. The downlink preemption may indicate whether to monitor for adownlink preemption indication for the cell. The monitoring capabilityconfig may indicate whether a monitoring capability of the wirelessdevice would be configured for the cell, where the capability is basedon a basic capability or an advanced capability. The base station mayconfigure up to M (e.g., M=10) search spaces for the BWP of the cell.The tpc-PUCCH, tpc-PUSCH, or tpc-SRS may enable and/or configurereception of TPC commands for PUCCH, PUSCH or SRS respectively. Theuplink cancellation may indicate to monitor uplink cancellation for thecell.

Configuration parameters of pdcch-ConfigCommon may comprise a controlresource set zero (e.g., controlResourceSetZero), a common controlresource set (e.g., commonControlResourceSet), a search space zero(e.g., searchSpaceZero), a list of common search space (e.g.,commonSearchSpaceList), a search space for SIB1 (e.g., searchSpaceSIB1),a search space for other SIB s (e.g.,searchSpaceOtherSystemInformation), a search space for paging (e.g.,pagingSearchSpace), a search space for random access (e.g.,ra-SearchSpace), and/or a first PDCCH monitoring occasion. The controlresource set zero may comprise parameters for a first coreset with anindex value zero. The coreset zero may be configured for an initialbandwidth part of the cell. The wireless device may use the controlresource set zero in a BWP of the cell, wherein the BWP is not theinitial BWP of the cell based on one or more conditions. For example, anumerology of the BWP may be same as the numerology of the initial BWP.For example, the BWP may comprise the initial BWP. For example, the BWPmay comprise the control resource set zero. The common control resourceset may be an additional common coreset that may be used for a commonsearch space (CSS) or a UE-specific search space (USS). The base stationmay configure a bandwidth of the common control resource set where thebandwidth is smaller than or equal to a bandwidth of the controlresource set zero. The base station may configure the common controlresource set such that it is contained within the control resource setzero (e.g., CORESET #0). The list of common search space may compriseone or more CSSs. The list of common search space may not comprise asearch space with index zero (e.g., SS #0). The first PDCCH monitoringoccasion may indicate monitoring occasion for paging occasion. The basestation may configure a search space for monitoring DCIs for paging(e.g., pagingSearchSpace), for RAR monitoring (e.g., ra-SearchSpace),for SIB1 (e.g., searchSpaceSIB1) and/or for other SIB s than SIB1 (e.g.,searchSpaceOtherSystemInformation). The search space with index zero(e.g., searchSpaceZero, SS #0) may be configured for the initial BWP ofthe cell. Similar to the coreset/CORESET #0, the SS #0 may be used inthe BWP of the cell based on the one or more conditions.

FIG. 18 illustrates example configuration parameters for a wirelessdevice to transmit control and/or data from a base station. A wirelessdevice may receive one or more radio resource control (RRC) messagescomprising configuration parameters of a cell. The configurationparameters may comprise one or more parameters of a serving cellconfiguration (e.g., ServingCellConfig). The one or more parameters ofthe serving cell configuration may comprise one or more downlinkbandwidth parts (e.g., a list of BWP-Downlinks). The one or moreparameters of the serving cell configuration may comprise one or moreuplink bandwidth parts (e.g., a list of BWP-Uplinks). An uplink BWP maycomprise a bandwidth part index (bwp-id), one or more common uplink BWPs(e.g., configured via SIB/MIB, BWP-UplinkCommon), and/or one or morededicated uplink BWPs (e.g., configured via RRC signaling,BWP-UplinkDedicated).

For example, configuration parameters of a cell-specific uplinkbandwidth (e.g., BWP-UplinkCommon) may indicate/compriserach-ConfigCommon, pusch-ConfigCommon and pucch-ConfigCommon. Forexample, pucch-ConfigCommon may comprise cell-specific parameters fortransmitting uplink control information (UCIs) via the cell-specificuplink bandwidth part (e.g., initial UL BWP). For example,pusch-ConfigCommon may comprise cell-specific parameters fortransmitting PUSCHs of transport blocks (TB s) via the cell-specificuplink bandwidth part. Configuration parameters of the UE-specificuplink bandwidth part (e.g., BWP-UplinkDedicated) may comprisepucch-Config, pusch-Config, srs-Config. For example, pucch-Config maycomprise one or more PUCCH resource sets, one or more PUCCH formats(format), one or more scheduling request (SR) resources, one or morevalues for an offset between a PDSCH to a PUCCH or a HARQ-ACK feedbackcorresponding to the PDSCH (e.g., dl-DataToUL-ACK), and/or spatialdomain filter parameters (spatialRelationInfo).

A base station may transmit one or more RRC messages comprising a listof one or more TCI-state configurations (e.g., a mother set of TCIstates) for a PDSCH-Config. The base station may configure the one ormore TCI-states to determine RX parameters to receive a downlink datafor a BWP of a cell. One or more TCI-states configured in the mother setof TCI states may be configured to a set of TCI-states for a CORESET.When a gNB configures more than one TCI-states in a CORESET, the gNB mayfurther active a TCI-state for the CORESET. A wireless device maysupport up to M active TCI-states where M may be different based on a UEcapability.

A TCI-state may comprise parameters for configuring a quasi col-location(QCL) relationship between one or more downlink reference signals andthe DM-RS ports used of the PDSCH (and/or a PDCCH). QCL relationshipsmay be configured by the base station using qcl-Type1 for the firstdownlink reference signal, and qcl-Type2 (optionally) for the seconddownlink reference signal. For example, different QCL-types may beconsidered to support various use cases and one of QLC-types may beindicated in each qcl-Type1 or qcl-Type2. For example, QCL-TypeA meansthat a downlink RS (e.g., CSI-RS, TRS) and DM-RSs of a PDSCH (and/or aPDCCH) may have similar properties in Doppler shift, Doppler spread,average delay and delay spread. For example, QCL-TypeB means that adownlink RS and DM-RSs of a PDSCH (and/or a PDCCH) may have similarproperties in Doppler shift and Doppler spread. For example, QCL-TypeCmeans that a downlink RS and DM-RSs of a PDSCH (and/or a PDCCH) may havesimilar properties in Doppler shift and average delay. For example,QCL-TypeD means that a downlink RS and DM-RSs of a PDSCH (and/or aPDCCH) may have similar properties in spatial RX parameters (e.g.,spatial domain filter parameter, spatial domain filter). QCL-TypeD maybe used between a gNB and a wireless device to determine one analog beam(e.g., a beam) from one or more analog beams (e.g., beams). A wirelessdevice may determine its spatial RX parameters to receive a downlinkanalog beam (e.g., beam) based on a QCL-TypeD property configured in aTCI-state.

In an example, a TCI-state may comprise an identifier of the TCI-state(e.g., tci-Stateld) and at least one QCL info (e.g., qcl-Type 1 and/orqcl-Type 2). A QCL info may indicate/comprise a serving cell index(ServCelllndex), a BWP id (BWP-Id), an index of a reference signal(e.g., between CSI-RS or SSB), and a QCL type (e.g., typeA, type B,typeC, and typeD). The reference signal may be used to determine spatialdomain filter parameters (e.g., spatial domain filter) related to theTCI-state used for receiving downlink signals and/or transmitting uplinksignals. The wireless device may receive a downlink channel based on theTCI-state. The wireless device may use/refer the reference signal andthe QCL type to determine a quasi co-location relationship between thereference signal and a DM-RS of the downlink channel (e.g., PDCCH orPDSCH).

In an example, a base station and a wireless device may support a firstmode (e.g., first TCI indication mechanism, a first spatial domainfilter parameter (e.g., spatial filter parameter) update mechanism, afirst type, a separate beam update mechanism) to update and/or apply aTCI state for a downlink channel or an uplink channel. For example, thefollowing shows an example of the first mode to determine a TCI state ofa PDSCH. In response to receiving the one or more RRC messages of theTCI-states (e.g., a mother set of TCI states) initially (e.g., RRCconfiguration of TCI-states first time) until the wireless device mayreceive the one or more MAC CE commands to activating a subset ofTCI-states from the mother set of TCI states, the wireless device mayassume that DM-RS ports of a PDSCH of a serving cell are QCL-ed with anSSB used in an initial access procedure with respect to QCL-Type A andQCL-TypeD if applicable. Based on the one or more MAC CE commands toactivate a subset of TCI-states, the wireless device may apply one TCIstate from the activated TCI-states for DM-RS ports of a PDSCH of theserving cell. A wireless device may receive an RRC message indicatingtci-PresentInDCI is enabled for a CORESET carrying a DCI comprising aresource assignment for a downlink PDSCH. In response to enabledtci-PresentInDCI, the wireless device may expect the DCI field‘Transmission Configuration Indication’ in a first DCI comprising aresource assignment based on one or more first DCI formats (e.g., DCIformat 1_1). The wireless device may not expect the DCI field‘Transmission Configuration Indication’ in a second DCI comprising aresource assignment based on one or more second DCI formats (e.g., DCIformat 1_0). A wireless device may determine QCL information of DM-RSports of a PDSCH based on at least:

-   -   in response to tci-PresentInDCI being enabled for a first        CORESET carrying a first DCI comprising a resource assignment        for a first PDSCH;        -   the first DCI indicating K0, a timing offset between a PDCCH            and its corresponding PDSCH, that is larger than or equal to            a Threshold-Sched-Offset, determining TCI information based            on the indicated TCI state by the first DCI;        -   otherwise (e.g., K0 is smaller than the            Threshold-Sched-Offset), determining QCL/TCI information            (e.g., a default TCI state) based on one or more CORESETs            within an active BWP of the serving cell where the one or            more CORESETs are monitored by the wireless device in the            latest slot and the index of the one or more CORESETs;            selecting a lowest indexed CORESET from the one or more            CORESETs and determining the QCL/TCI information based on a            QCL/TCI state of the lowest indexed CORESET; in response to            tci-PresentInDCI not being enabled for a second CORESET            carrying a second DCI comprising a resource assignment for a            first PDSCH or a third DCI is based on the one or more            second DCI formats (e.g., DCI format 1_0):        -   the second DCI indicating K0, a timing offset between a            PDCCH and its corresponding PDSCH, that is larger than or            equal to a Threshold-Sched-Offset, determining QCL/TCI            information based on the QCL/TCI state of the second            CORESET;        -   otherwise (e.g., K0 is smaller than the            Threshold-Sched-Offset), determining QCL/TCI information            (e.g., a default TCI state) based on one or more CORESETs            within an active BWP of the serving cell where the one or            more CORESETs are monitored by the wireless device in the            latest slot and the index of the one or more CORESETs;            selecting a lowest indexed CORESET from the one or more            CORESETs and determining the QCL/TCI information based on a            QCL/TCI state of the lowest indexed CORESET.

A wireless device may receive one or more MAC CE commands indicating upto K (e.g., K=8) TCI sates from the RRC configured TCI states (e.g., themother set of TCI states) to one or more codepoints of a DCI field‘Transmission Configuration Indication’ (if present). One or more DCIformats (e.g., DCI format 1_1) may carry the DCI field ‘TransmissionConfiguration Indication’. In an example, the wireless device maytransmit a HARQ-ACK corresponding to a PDSCH in slot n. The PDSCH maycomprise/carry the activation command. In response to the transmittingthe HARQ-ACK in the slot n, the wireless device may apply the mappingbetween the one or more TCI-states and the one or more codepoints of theDCI field “Transmission Configuration Indication” starting from slotn+3N_(slot) ^(subframe,μ)+1.

FIG. 19 illustrates an example embodiment of the first mode to updateand/or apply a TCI state for a downlink channel or an uplink channel.The base station may transmit one or more RRC messagescomprising/indicating configuration parameters. The configurationparameters may comprise one or more TCI states for a CORESET. Theconfiguration parameters may comprise/indicate one or more second TCIstates for data channel such as PDSCH. The configuration parameters maycomprise spatial domain filter parameters for uplink data and/or uplinkcontrol channels. The wireless device may receive the one or more RRCmessages at a time T0.

After the wireless device receives an initial higher layer configurationof one or more TCI-states at the time T0 and before a reception of anactivation command via a MAC-CE at a time T1, the wireless device maydetermine a TCI-state of a PDCCH or a coreset based on a SS/PBCH blockvia an initial access procedure. For example, the SS/PBCH block is aSS/PBCH block selected for a random access procedure which occurs duringthe initial access procedure. For example, the SS/PBCH block is aSS/PBCH block with a best/good signal quality (e.g., a signal quality ofthe SS/PBCH block exceeds a threshold). The wireless device maydetermine QCL-TypeA properties based on the SS/PBCH block. The wirelessdevice may determine QCL-TypeD properties based on the SS/PBCH block.The wireless device may determine a TCI state of a PDSCH based on aPDCCH or a coreset scheduling the PDCCH, where the TCI state of thePDSCH is same as a second TCI state of the PDCCH or the coreset.

Between T0 and T1, the wireless device may determine a spatial domainfilter parameter (or a TCI state) of a PUSCH via a cell based on aspatial domain filter parameter (or a TCI state) of a PUCCH resourcewith a lowest index among one or more configured PUCCH resources if theone or more PUCCH resources are configured for the cell. The wirelessdevice may determine a spatial domain filter parameter (or a TCI state)of a PUSCH via a cell based on a TCI state) of a coreset with a lowestindex among one or more coresets of the cell when default beam pathlossfor PUSCH is enabled. The wireless device may determine a TCI state of aPUSCH based on an SRS resource indicator (SRI) associated with thePUSCH. The wireless device may determine a spatial domain filterparameter of a PUCCH based on a most recent random access procedure(e.g., a spatial domain filter parameter used for a preambletransmission for the most recent random access procedure). The mostrecent random access procedure may be performed for an initial accessprocess or Reconfiguration with sync procedure (e.g., handover) or beamfailure recovery procedure or an uplink synchronization.

The wireless device may receive an activation MAC CE at the time T1. Theactivation MAC CE may activate one or more TCI states for receivingPDSCHs. The activation MAC CE may activate a TCI state for a CORESET. Inresponse to receiving the MAC CE activating the one or more TCI statesfor receiving PDSCHs, the wireless device may activate the one or moreTCI states. The base station may transmit a DCI (e.g., based on DCIformat 1_1) comprising a TCI state (or a TCI state code point) thatindicating one TCI of the one or more TCI states. The wireless devicemay receive a PDSCH based on the DCI via the indicated TCI state.Similarly, a second DCI (e.g., based on DCI format 0_1 ) may indicate anSRI indicating a spatial domain filter parameter. The wireless devicemay transmit a PUSCH based on the second DCI via the indicated SRI.

The wireless device may receive a DCI based on a fallback DCI format(e.g., DCI format 1_0 or 0_0). The wireless device may determine aspatial domain filter parameter or a TCI state for a scheduled datareception or transmission based on a rule. For example, for a PDSCH, thewireless device may follow a coreset or a DCI scheduling the PDSCH. Forexample, for a PUSCH, the wireless device may follow a TCI state of alowest coreset or a TCI state or a spatial domain filter parameter of alowest indexed PUCCH. In FIG. 19, the wireless device receives a firstDCI (e.g., DCI 0_0), based on a fallback DCI format (e.g., DCI format1_0 or a DCI format 0_0), scheduling a PUSCH of a cell. The wirelessdevice determines a spatial domain filter parameter of the PUSCH basedon a lowest indexed coreset of the cell. In FIG. 19, the wireless devicereceives a second DCI (e.g., DCI 1_1 or DCI 0_1 ), based on anon-fallback DCI format (e.g., DCI format 1_1 or DCI format 0_1 ),scheduling a PDSCH or a PUSCH, the wireless device may determine a TCIstate or a spatial domain filter parameter of the PDSCH or the PUSCHbased on the DCI if TCI is indicated by the DCI.

In an example, a wireless device may monitor one or more CORESETs (orone or more search spaces) within/in an active BWP (e.g., activedownlink BWP) of a serving cell in one or more slots. In an example, themonitoring the one or more CORESETs within/in the active BWP of theserving cell in the one or more slots may comprise monitoring at leastone CORESET within/in the active BWP of the serving cell in each slot ofthe one or more slots. In an example, a latest slot of the one or moreslots may occur latest in time. In an example, the wireless device maymonitor, within/in the active BWP of the serving cell, one or moresecond CORESETs of the one or more CORESETs in the latest slot. Inresponse to the monitoring the one or more second CORESETs in the latestslot and the latest slot occurring latest in time, the wireless devicemay determine the latest slot. In an example, each CORESET of the one ormore second CORESETs may be identified by a CORESET specific index(e.g., indicated by a higher layer CORESET-ID). In an example, a CORESETspecific index of a CORESET of the one or more secondary CORESETs may bethe lowest among the CORESET specific indices of the one or more secondCORESETs. In an example, the wireless device may monitor a search spaceassociated with the CORESET in the latest slot. In an example, inresponse to the CORESET specific index of the CORESET being the lowestand the monitoring the search space associated with the CORESET in thelatest slot, the wireless device may select the CORESET of the one ormore secondary CORESETs.

In an example, when the offset between the reception of the DCI in theCORESET and the PDSCH scheduled by the DCI is lower than the threshold(e.g., Threshold-Sched-Offset), the wireless device may perform adefault PDSCH RS selection. In an example, in the default PDSCH RSselection, the wireless device may assume that one or more DM-RS portsof the PDSCH of a serving cell are quasi co-located with one or more RSsin a TCI-state with respect to one or more QCL type parameter(s). Theone or more RSs in the TCI-state may be used for PDCCH quasi co-locationindication of the (selected) CORESET of the one or more second CORESETs.

In an example, a wireless device may receive a DCI via a PDCCH in aCORESET. In an example, the DCI may schedule a PDSCH. In an example, anoffset between a reception of the DCI and the PDSCH may be less than athreshold (e.g., Threshold-Sched-Offset). A first QCL type (e.g.,‘QCL-TypeD’, etc.) of one or more DM-RS ports of the PDSCH may bedifferent from a second QCL type (e.g., ‘QCL-TypeD’, etc.) of one ormore second DM-RS ports of the PDCCH. In an example, the PDSCH and thePDCCH may overlap in at least one symbol. In an example, in response tothe PDSCH and the PDCCH overlapping in at least one symbol and the firstQCL type being different from the second QCL type, the wireless devicemay prioritize a reception of the PDCCH associated with the coreset. Inan example, the prioritizing may apply to an intra-band CA case (whenthe PDSCH and the CORESET are in different component carriers). In anexample, the prioritizing the reception of the PDCCH may comprisereceiving the PDSCH with the second QCL type of one or more second DM-RSports of the PDCCH. In an example, the prioritizing the reception of thePDCCH may comprise overwriting the first QCL type of the one or moreDM-RS ports of the PDSCH with the second QCL type of the one or moresecond DM-RS ports of the PDCCH. In an example, the prioritizing thereception of the PDCCH may comprise assuming a spatial QCL of the PDCCH(e.g., the second QCL type), for the simultaneous reception of the PDCCHand PDSCH, on the PDSCH. In an example, the prioritizing the receptionof the PDCCH may comprise applying a spatial QCL of the PDCCH (e.g., thesecond QCL type), for the simultaneous reception of the PDCCH and PDSCH,on the PDSCH. In an example, the prioritizing the reception of the PDCCHmay comprise receiving the PDCCH and not receiving the PDSCH.

In an example, none of the configured TCI-states may contain a QCL type(e.g., ‘QCL-TypeD’). In response to the none of the configuredTCI-states containing the QCL type, the wireless device may obtain theother QCL assumptions from the indicated TCI-states for its scheduledPDSCH irrespective of the time offset between the reception of the DCIand the corresponding PDSCH.

In an example, a base station may configure a wireless device with oneor more sounding reference signal (SRS) resource sets by a higher layerparameter SRS-ResourceSet. In an example, for an SRS resource set of theone or more SRS resource sets, the base station may configure thewireless device with one or more SRS resources by a higher layerparameter SRS-Resource. In an example, the wireless device may indicatea maximum value of a number of the one or more SRS resources to the basestation (e.g., by SRS capability). In an example, the base station mayconfigure an applicability of the SRS resource set by a higher layerparameter usage in the higher layer parameter SRS-ResourceSet.

In an example, when the higher layer parameter usage is set to‘BeamManagement’, the wireless device may transmit, at a given timeinstant, one SRS resource of the one or more SRS resources in each SRSresource set (e.g., simultaneously). In an example, the wireless devicemay determine that the one SRS resource of the one or more SRS resourcesin each SRS resource set may have the same time domain behaviour in asame BWP (e.g., uplink BWP). In an example, in response to thedetermining, the wireless device may transmit the one SRS resource ofthe one or more SRS resources in each SRS resource set in the same BWPsimultaneously.

In an example, when the higher layer parameter usage is set to‘BeamManagement’, the wireless device may transmit, at a given timeinstant, only one SRS resource in each of the one or more SRS resourcesets (e.g., simultaneously). In an example, the wireless device maydetermine that the only one SRS resource in each of the one or more SRSresource sets may have the same time domain behaviour in a same BWP(e.g., uplink BWP). In an example, in response to the determining, thewireless device may transmit the only one SRS resource in each of theone or more SRS resource sets in the same BWP simultaneously.

In an example, when the higher layer parameter usage is set to‘BeamManagement’, the wireless device may transmit, at a given timeinstant, one SRS resource in each of one or more SRS resource setssimultaneously. In an example, the wireless device may determine thatthe one SRS resource in each of the one or more SRS resource sets mayhave the same time domain behaviour in a same BWP (e.g., uplink BWP). Inan example, in response to the determining, the wireless device maytransmit the one SRS resource in each of the one or more SRS resourcesets in the same BWP simultaneously.

In an example, the one or more SRS resource sets may comprise a firstSRS resource set and a second SRS resource set. In an example, the firstSRS resource set may comprise one or more first SRS resources. The oneor more first SRS resources may comprise a first SRS resource and asecond SRS resource. In an example, the second SRS resource set maycomprise one or more second SRS resources. The one or more second SRSresources may comprise a third SRS resource and a fourth SRS resource.

In an example, a first time domain behaviour of the first SRS resourceand a third time domain behaviour of the third SRS resource may be thesame in a BWP. In an example, when the higher layer parameter usage isset to ‘BeamManagement’, the wireless device may transmit, in a giventime instant in the BWP, the first SRS resource of the first SRSresource set and the third SRS resource of the second SRS resource setsimultaneously, in response to the first time domain behaviour of thefirst SRS resource and the third time domain behaviour of the third SRSresource being the same.

In an example, a first time domain behaviour of the first SRS resourceand a fourth time domain behaviour of the fourth SRS resource may bedifferent in a BWP. In an example, when the higher layer parameter usageis set to ‘BeamManagement’, the wireless device may not transmit, in agiven time instant in the BWP, the first SRS resource of the first SRSresource set and the fourth SRS resource of the second SRS resource setsimultaneously in response to the first time domain behaviour of thefirst SRS resource and the fourth time domain behaviour of the fourthSRS resource being different.

In an example, a second time domain behaviour of the second SRS resourceand a fourth time domain behaviour of the fourth SRS resource may be thesame in a BWP. In an example, when the higher layer parameter usage isset to ‘BeamManagement’, the wireless device may transmit, in a giventime instant in the BWP, the second SRS resource of the first SRSresource set and the fourth SRS resource of the second SRS resource setsimultaneously in response to the second time domain behaviour of thesecond SRS resource and the fourth time domain behaviour of the fourthSRS resource being the same.

In an example, a second time domain behaviour of the second SRS resourceand a third time domain behaviour of the third SRS resource may bedifferent in a BWP. In an example, when the higher layer parameter usageis set to ‘BeamManagement’, the wireless device may not transmit, in agiven time instant in the BWP, the second SRS resource of the first SRSresource set and the third SRS resource of the second SRS resource setsimultaneously in response to the second time domain behaviour of thesecond SRS resource and the third time domain behaviour of the third SRSresource being different.

In an example, the higher layer parameter SRS-Resource may configure,semi-statically, at least one of: an srs resource index (e.g., providedby a higher layer parameter srs-ResourceId) indicating a configurationof an SRS resource; a time domain behaviour of the configuration of theSRS resource (e.g., indicated by a higher layer parameter resourceType);an SRS sequence ID (e.g., provided by a higher layer parametersequenceld; and a configuration of a spatial relation between areference RS and a target SRS. In an example, the base station mayconfigure the wireless device with a higher layer parameterspatialRelationInfo. In an example, the higher layer parameterspatialRelationInfo may comprise an index (ID) of the reference RS. Inan example, the time domain behaviour of an SRS resource may be aperiodic transmission, a semi-persistent transmission, or an aperiodicSRS transmission. In an example, a time domain behavior of an SRSresource may comprise a transmission periodicity, a transmission offsetof the SRS resource, etc.

In an example, the wireless device may determine that a higher layerparameter servingCellld indicating a serving cell may be present in thehigher layer parameter spatialRelationInfo. In response to thedetermining, the wireless device may determine that the reference RS maybe a first RS (e.g., SS/PBCH block, CSI-RS) configured on the servingcell.

In an example, the wireless device may determine that a higher layerparameter uplinkBWP indicating an uplink BWP and a higher layerparameter servingCellld indicating a serving cell may be present in thehigher layer parameter spatialRelationInfo. In an example, in responseto the determining, the wireless device may determine that the referenceRS may be a first RS (e.g., SRS) configured on the uplink BWP of theserving cell.

In an example, the base station may configure the target SRS on aserving cell. In an example, the wireless device may determine that ahigher layer parameter servingCellld may be absent in the higher layerparameter spatialRelationInfo. In response to the determining, thewireless device may determine that the reference RS may be a first RS(e.g., SS/PBCH block, CSI-RS) configured on the serving cell.

In an example, the base station may configure the target SRS on aserving cell. In an example, the wireless device may determine that ahigher layer parameter servingCellld is absent and a higher layerparameter uplinkBWP indicating an uplink BWP is present in the higherlayer parameter spatialRelationInfo. In response to the determining, thewireless device may determine that the reference RS may be a first RS(e.g., SRS) configured on the uplink BWP the serving cell.

In an example, a wireless device may transmit PUSCH and SRS in a sameslot. In response to the transmitting the PUSCH and SRS in the sameslot, the base station may configure the wireless device to transmit theSRS after the transmission of the PUSCH (and the corresponding DM-RS).

In an example, a base station may configure a wireless device with oneor more SRS resource configurations. In an example, a higher layerparameter resourceType in a higher layer parameter SRS-Resource may beset to “periodic”.

In an example, the base station may configure the wireless device with ahigher layer parameter spatialRelationInfo. The higher layer parameterspatialRelationInfo may comprise an ID of a reference RS (e.g.,ssb-Index, csi-RS-Index, srs).

In an example, the reference RS may be a SS/PBCH block. In an example,the reference RS may be a CSI-RS (e.g., periodic CSI-RS, semi-persistentCSI-RS, aperiodic CSI-RS). In an example, the wireless device may use aspatial domain reception (Rx) filter to receive the reference RS. In anexample, in response to the higher layer parameter spatialRelationInfoindicating the reference RS (e.g., by the ID of the reference RS) beingthe SS/PBCH block or the CSI-RS, the wireless device may transmit atarget SRS resource with a spatial domain transmission (Tx) filter sameas the spatial domain reception (Rx) filter. In an example, in responseto the higher layer parameter spatialRelationInfo indicating thereference RS (e.g., by the ID of the reference RS), the wireless devicemay transmit a target SRS resource with the spatial domain Rx filter.

In an example, the reference RS may be an SRS (e.g., periodic SRS,semi-persistent SRS, aperiodic SRS). In an example, the wireless devicemay use a spatial domain transmission (Tx) filter to transmit thereference RS. In an example, in response to the higher layer parameterspatialRelationInfo indicating the reference RS (e.g., by the ID of thereference RS) being the SRS, the wireless device may transmit a targetSRS resource with the spatial domain transmission (Tx) filter.

In an example, the base station may activate and deactivate one or moreconfigured SRS resource sets (e.g., semi-persistent SRS resource sets)of a serving cell by sending an SP SRS Activation/Deactivation MAC CE.In an example, the one or more configured SRS resource sets may beinitially deactivated upon configuration. In an example, the one or moreconfigured SRS resource sets may be deactivated after a handover.

In an example, a base station may configure a wireless device with oneor more SRS resource sets (e.g., semi-persistent SRS resource sets). Inan example, a higher layer parameter resourceType in a higher layerparameter SRS-Resource may be set to “semi-persistent”. In an example,the wireless device may receive, from the base station, an activationcommand (e.g., SP SRS Activation/Deactivation MAC CE) for an SRSresource set of the one or more SRS resource sets. In an example, aPDSCH may carry the activation command. In an example, the wirelessdevice may transmit an HARQ-ACK for the PDSCH in a slot n. In anexample, in response to the transmitting the HARQ-ACK for the PDSCH inthe slot n, the wireless device may apply one or moreassumptions/actions for an SRS transmission of the SRS resource setstarting from the slot n+3N_(slot) ^(subframe,μ)+1. In an example, theactivation command may comprise one or more spatial relation assumptionsfor one or more SRS resources of the SRS resource set. In an example, afirst field (e.g., Resource IDi) in the activation command may comprisean identifier of a resource (e.g., SS/PBCH block, NZP CSI-RS, SRS) usedfor spatial relationship derivation for an SRS resource of the one ormore SRS resources. In an example, the one or more spatial relationassumptions may be provided by a list of references to one or morereference signal IDs (e.g., SSB-Index, SRS-ResourceId, etc.), one perSRS resource of the (activated) SRS resource set. In an example, aspatial relation assumption of the one or more spatial relationassumption may be provided by a reference to an ID of a reference RS. Inan example, the reference RS may be SS/PBCH block, NZP CSI-RS resource,or SRS.

In an example, a Resource Serving Cell ID field indicating a servingcell may be present in the activation command. In an example, thereference RS may be an SS/PBCH block resource or a NZP CSI-RS resource.In response to the Resource Serving Cell ID field being present and thereference RS being the SS/PBCH block resource or the NZP CSI-RSresource, the reference RS (e.g., SS/PBCH block, NZP CSI-RS resource)may be configured on the serving cell.

In an example, the base station may configure the (activated) SRSresource set on a serving cell. In an example, a Resource Serving CellID field may be absent in the activation command. In response to theResource Serving Cell ID field being absent and the base stationconfiguring the SRS resource set on the serving cell, the reference RS(e.g., SS/PBCH block, NZP CSI-RS resource) may be configured on theserving cell.

In an example, a Resource Serving Cell ID field indicating a servingcell and a Resource BWP ID field indicating an uplink BWP may be presentin the activation command. In response to the Resource Serving Cell IDfield and the Resource BWP ID field being present, the reference RS(e.g., SRS resource) may be configured on the uplink BWP of the servingcell.

In an example, the base station may configure the SRS resource set on anuplink BWP of a serving cell. In an example, a Resource Serving Cell IDfield and a Resource BWP ID field may be absent in the activationcommand. In response to the Resource Serving Cell ID field and theResource BWP ID field being absent and the SRS resource set beingconfigured on the uplink BWP of the serving cell, the reference RS(e.g., SRS resource) may be configured on the uplink BWP of the servingcell.

In an example, the base station may configure an SRS resource in the(activated) SRS resource set with a higher layer parameterspatialRelationInfo. In response to the SRS resource, in the (activated)SRS resource set, being configured with the higher layer parameterspatialRelationInfo, the wireless device may assume that a reference RS(e.g., indicated by an ID of the reference RS) in the activation commandoverrides a second reference RS configured in the higher layer parameterspatialRelationInfo.

In an example, the wireless device may receive, from the base station, adeactivation command (e.g., SP SRS Activation/Deactivation MAC CE) foran (activated) SRS resource set of the one or more SRS resource sets. Inan example, a PDSCH may carry the deactivation command. In an example,the wireless device may transmit an HARQ-ACK for the PDSCH in a slot n.In an example, in response to the transmitting the HARQ-ACK for thePDSCH in the slot n, the wireless device may apply one or moreassumptions/actions for a cessation of an SRS transmission of the(deactivated) SRS resource set starting from the slot n+3N_(slot)^(subframe,μ)1.

In an example, a wireless device may activate a semi-persistent SRSresource configuration on an uplink BWP of a serving cell in response toreceiving, from a base station, an activation command for thesemi-persistent SRS resource configuration. In an example, the wirelessdevice may not receive, from the base station, a deactivation commandfor the semi-persistent SRS resource configuration.

In an example, the uplink BWP may be an active uplink BWP of the servingcell. In an example, in response to the uplink BWP being the activeuplink BWP of the serving cell and not receiving the deactivationcommand for the semi-persistent SRS resource configuration, the wirelessdevice may consider the semi-persistent SRS resource configurationactive. In an example, in response to the considering, the wirelessdevice may transmit an SRS transmission, via the uplink BWP of theserving cell, according to the semi-persistent SRS resourceconfiguration.

In an example, the uplink BWP may not be an active uplink BWP of theserving cell. In an example, the uplink BWP not being the active uplinkBWP may comprise the uplink BWP being deactivated in the serving cell.In response to not receiving the deactivation command for thesemi-persistent SRS resource configuration and the uplink BWP beingdeactivated, the wireless device may assume that the semi-persistent SRSconfiguration is suspended in the UL BWP of the serving cell. In anexample, the semi-persistent SRS configuration being suspended in the ULBWP may comprise that the wireless device may reactivate thesemi-persistent SRS configuration when the UL BWP becomes an active ULBWP of the serving cell.

In an example, a first SRS resource of an SRS resource set may have afirst time domain behavior (e.g., periodic, semi-persistent, oraperiodic, etc.). In an example, a second SRS resource of the SRSresource set may have a second time domain behavior (e.g., periodic,semi-persistent, or aperiodic, etc.). In an example, in response to thefirst SRS resource and the second SRS resource being in the (same) SRSresource set, the wireless device may expect that the first time domainbehavior and the second time behavior are the same. In an example, inresponse to the first SRS resource and the second SRS resource being inthe (same) SRS resource set, the wireless device may not expect that thefirst time domain behavior and the second time behavior are different.

In an example, an SRS resource of an SRS resource set may have a firsttime domain behavior (e.g., periodic, semi-persistent, or aperiodic,etc.). In an example, the SRS resource set may have a second time domainbehavior (e.g., periodic, semi-persistent, or aperiodic, etc.). In anexample, in response to the SRS resource being associated with the SRSresource set, the wireless device may expect that the first time domainbehavior and the second time behavior are the same. In an example, inresponse to the SRS resource and the SRS resource set being associated,the wireless device may not expect that the first time domain behaviorand the second time behavior are different. In an example, the SRSresource being associated with the SRS resource set may comprise thatthe SRS resource set comprises the SRS resource. In an example, the SRSresource being associated with the SRS resource set may comprise thatthe SRS resource is an element of the SRS resource set.

In an example, a base station may configure a wireless device with aPUCCH on at least one first symbol on a carrier (e.g., SUL, NUL). In anexample, the PUCCH may carry/comprise one or more CSI reports. In anexample, the PUCCH may carry/comprise one or more L1-RSRP reports. In anexample, the PUCCH may carry/comprise HARQ-ACK and/or SR. In an example,the base station may configure the wireless device with an SRSconfiguration on the carrier. In an example, the SRS configuration maybe a semi-persistent SRS configuration. In an example, the SRSconfiguration may be a periodic SRS configuration. In an example, thewireless device may determine that the PUCCH and an SRS transmission ofthe SRS configuration overlap in at least one symbol. In an example, thewireless device may determine that the at least one first symbol of thePUCCH and at least one second symbol of the SRS transmission of the SRSconfiguration may overlap in the at least one symbol. In an example, inresponse to the determining, the wireless device may not perform the SRStransmission, on the carrier, on the at least one symbol.

In an example, a base station may configure a wireless device with aPUCCH on at least one first symbol on a carrier (e.g., SUL, NUL). In anexample, the PUCCH may carry/comprise HARQ-ACK and/or SR. In an example,the base station may trigger an SRS configuration on the carrier. In anexample, the SRS configuration may be an aperiodic SRS configuration. Inan example, the wireless device may determine that the PUCCH and an SRStransmission of the SRS configuration overlap in at least one symbol. Inan example, the wireless device may determine that the at least onefirst symbol of the PUCCH and at least one second symbol of the SRStransmission of the SRS configuration may overlap in the at least onesymbol. In an example, in response to the determining, the wirelessdevice may not perform the SRS transmission, on the carrier, on the atleast one symbol.

In an example, the not performing the SRS transmission may comprisedropping the SRS transmission on the at least one symbol. In an example,the wireless device may perform the SRS transmission on at least onethird symbol of the at least one second symbol. The at least one thirdsymbol may not overlap with the at least one symbol.

In an example, a base station may configure a wireless device with aPUCCH on at least one first symbol on a carrier (e.g., SUL, NUL). In anexample, the PUCCH may carry/comprise one or more semi-persistent CSIreports. In an example, the PUCCH may carry/comprise one or moreperiodic CSI reports. In an example, the PUCCH may carry/comprise one ormore semi-persistent L1-RSRP reports. In an example, the PUCCH maycarry/comprise one or more periodic L1-RSRP reports. In an example, thebase station may trigger an SRS configuration on the carrier. In anexample, the SRS configuration may be an aperiodic SRS configuration. Inan example, the wireless device may determine that the PUCCH and an SRStransmission of the SRS configuration overlap in at least one symbol. Inan example, the wireless device may determine that the at least onefirst symbol of the PUCCH and at least one second symbol of the SRStransmission of the SRS configuration being the aperiodic SRSconfiguration may overlap in the at least one symbol. In an example, inresponse to the determining, the wireless device may not transmit thePUCCH, on the carrier, on the at least one symbol.

In an example, in an intra-band carrier aggregation (CA) or in aninter-band CA band-band combination, a wireless device may not transmitan SRS and a PUCCH/PUSCH simultaneously. In an example, in response tonot transmitting the SRS and the PUCCH/PUSCH simultaneously, a basestation may not configure the wireless device with an SRS transmissionfrom a first carrier and a PUCCH/PUSCH (e.g., PUSCH/UL DM-RS/ULPT-RS/PUCCH formats) in a second carrier in the same symbol. In anexample, the first carrier may be different from the second carrier.

In an example, in an intra-band carrier aggregation (CA) or in aninter-band CA band-band combination, a wireless device may not transmitan SRS and a PRACH simultaneously. In an example, in response to nottransmitting the SRS and the PRACH simultaneously, the wireless devicemay not transmit an SRS from a first carrier and a PRACH from a secondcarrier simultaneously. In an example, the first carrier may bedifferent from the second carrier.

In an example, a base station may configure a wireless device with aperiodic SRS transmission on at least one symbol (e.g., OFDM symbol). Inan example, the base station may configure an SRS resource with a higherlayer parameter resourceType set as ‘aperiodic’. In an example, the basestation may trigger the SRS resource on the at least one symbol. In anexample, in response to the SRS resource with the higher layer parameterresourceType set as ‘aperiodic’ being triggered on the at least onesymbol configured with the periodic SRS transmission, the wirelessdevice may transmit the (aperiodic) SRS resource on the (overlapped) atleast one symbol. In an example, in response to the SRS resource withthe higher layer parameter resourceType set as ‘aperiodic’ beingtriggered on the at least one symbol configured with the periodic SRStransmission, the wireless device may not perform the periodic SRStransmission on the at least one symbol. In an example, the notperforming the periodic SRS transmission may comprise that the wirelessdevice may not transmit an SRS associated with the periodic SRStransmission on the (overlapped) at least one symbol.

In an example, a base station may configure a wireless device with asemi-persistent SRS transmission on at least one symbol (e.g., OFDMsymbol). In an example, the base station may configure an SRS resourcewith a higher layer parameter resourceType set as ‘aperiodic’. In anexample, the base station may trigger the SRS resource on the at leastone symbol. In an example, in response to the SRS resource with thehigher layer parameter resourceType set as ‘aperiodic’ being triggeredon the at least one symbol configured with the semi-persistent SRStransmission, the wireless device may transmit the (aperiodic) SRSresource on the (overlapped) at least one symbol. In an example, inresponse to the SRS resource with the higher layer parameterresourceType set as ‘aperiodic’ being triggered on the at least onesymbol configured with the semi-persistent SRS transmission, thewireless device may not perform the semi-persistent SRS transmission onthe at least one symbol. In an example, the not performing thesemi-persistent SRS transmission may comprise that the wireless devicemay not transmit an SRS associated with the semi-persistent SRStransmission on the (overlapped) at least one symbol.

In an example, a base station may configure a wireless device with aperiodic SRS transmission on at least one symbol (e.g., OFDM symbol). Inan example, the base station may configure an SRS resource with a higherlayer parameter resourceType set as ‘semi-persistent’. In an example,the base station may trigger the SRS resource on the at least onesymbol. In an example, in response to the SRS resource with the higherlayer parameter resourceType set as ‘ semi-persistent’ being triggeredon the at least one symbol configured with the periodic SRStransmission, the wireless device may transmit the (semi-persistent) SRSresource on the (overlapped) at least one symbol. In an example, inresponse to the SRS resource with the higher layer parameterresourceType set as ‘semi-persistent’ being triggered on the at leastone symbol configured with the periodic SRS transmission, the wirelessdevice may not perform the periodic SRS transmission on the at least onesymbol. In an example, the not performing the periodic SRS transmissionmay comprise that the wireless device may not transmit an SRS associatedwith the periodic SRS transmission on the (overlapped) at least onesymbol.

In an example, a wireless device may be configured, by a base station,with one or more serving cells. In an example, the base station mayactivate one or more second serving cells of the one or more servingcells. In an example, the base station may configure each activatedserving cell of the one or more second serving cells with a respectivePDCCH monitoring. In an example, the wireless device may monitor a setof PDCCH candidates in one or more CORESETs on an active DL BWP of eachactivated serving cell configured with the respective PDCCH monitoring.In an example, the wireless device may monitor the set of PDCCHcandidates in the one or more CORESETs according to corresponding searchspace sets. In an example, the monitoring may comprise decoding eachPDCCH candidate of the set of PDCCH candidates according to monitoredDCI formats.

In an example, a set of PDCCH candidates for a wireless device tomonitor may be defined in terms of PDCCH search space sets. In anexample, a search space set may be a common search space (CSS) set or aUE specific search space (USS) set.

In an example, one or more PDCCH monitoring occasions may be associatedwith a SS/PBCH block. In an example, the SS/PBCH block may bequasi-co-located with a CSI-RS. In an example, a TCI-state of an activeBWP may comprise the CSI-RS. In an example, the active BWP may comprisea CORESET identified with index being equal to zero (e.g., CORESET zero,or CORESET#0, etc.). In an example, the wireless device may determinethe TCI-state by the most recent of: an indication by a MAC-CEactivation command or a random-access procedure that is not initiated bya PDCCH order that triggers a non-contention based random accessprocedure. In an example, for a DCI format with CRC scrambled by aC-RNTI, a wireless device may monitor corresponding PDCCH candidates atthe one or more PDCCH monitoring occasions in response to the one ormore PDCCH monitoring occasions being associated with the SS/PBCH block.

In an example, a base station may configure a wireless device with oneor more DL BWPs in a serving cell. In an example, for a DL BWP of theone or more DL BWPs, the wireless device may be provided by a higherlayer signaling with one or more (e.g., 2, 3) control resource sets(CORESETs). For a CORESET of the one or more CORESETs, the base stationmay provide the wireless device, by a higher layer parameterControlResourceSet, at least one of: a CORESET index (e.g., provided byhigher layer parameter controlResourceSetId), a DMRS scrambling sequenceinitialization value (e.g., provided by a higher layer parameterpdcch-DMRS-ScramblinglD); a number of consecutive symbols (e.g.,provided by a higher layer parameter duration), a set of resource blocks(e.g., provided by higher layer parameter frequencyDomainResources),CCE-to-REG mapping parameters (e.g., provided by higher layer parametercce-REG-MappingType), an antenna port quasi co-location (e.g., from aset of antenna port quasi co-locations provided by a first higher layerparameter tci-StatesPDCCH-ToAddList and a second higher layer parametertci-StatesPDCCH-ToReleaseList), and an indication for a presence orabsence of a TCI (e.g., transmission configuration indication, etc.)field for a DCI format (e.g., DCI format 1_1) transmitted by a PDCCH inthe CORESET (e.g., provided by higher layer parameter TCI-PresentInDCI).In an example, the antenna port quasi co-location may indicate a quasico-location information of one or more DM-RS antenna ports for a PDCCHreception in the CORESET. In an example, the CORESET index may be uniqueamong the one or more DL BWPs of the serving cell. In an example, whenthe higher layer parameter TCI-PresentInDCI is absent, the wirelessdevice may consider that a TCI field is absent/disabled in the DCIformat.

In an example, a first higher layer parameter tci-StatesPDCCH-ToAddListand a second higher layer parameter tci-StatesPDCCH-ToReleaseList mayprovide a subset of TCI-states defined in pdsch-Config. In an example,the wireless device may use the subset of the TCI-states to provide oneor more QCL relationships between one or more RS in a TCI-state of thesubset of the TCI-states and one or more DM-RS ports of a PDCCHreception in the CORESET.

In an example, a base station may configure a CORESET for a wirelessdevice. In an example, a CORESET index (e.g., provided by higher layerparameter controlResourceSetId) of the CORESET may be non-zero. In anexample, the base station may not provide the wireless device with aconfiguration of one or more TCI-states, by a first higher layerparameter tci-StatesPDCCH-ToAddList and/or a second higher layerparameter tci-StatesPDCCH-ToReleaseList, for the CORESET. In an example,in response to not being provided with the configuration of the one ormore TCI-states for the CORESET, the wireless device may assume that oneor more DMRS antenna ports for a PDCCH reception in the CORESET is quasico-located with an RS (e.g., SS/PBCH block). In an example, the wirelessdevice may identify the RS during an initial access procedure.

In an example, a base station may configure a CORESET for a wirelessdevice. In an example, a CORESET index (e.g., provided by higher layerparameter controlResourceSetId) of the CORESET may be non-zero. In anexample, the base station may provide the wireless device with aninitial configuration of at least two TCI-states, by a first higherlayer parameter tci-StatesPDCCH-ToAddList and/or a second higher layerparameter tci-StatesPDCCH-ToReleaseList, for the CORESET. In an example,the wireless device may receive the initial configuration of the atleast two TCI-states from the base station. In an example, the wirelessdevice may not receive a MAC-CE activation command for at least one ofthe at least two TCI-states for the CORESET. In an example, in responseto being provided with the initial configuration for the CORESET and notreceiving the MAC-CE activation command for the CORESET, the wirelessdevice may assume that one or more DMRS antenna ports for a PDCCHreception in the CORESET is quasi co-located with an RS (e.g., SS/PBCHblock). In an example, the wireless device may identify the RS during aninitial access procedure.

In an example, a base station may configure a CORESET for a wirelessdevice. In an example, a CORESET index (e.g., provided by higher layerparameter controlResourceSetId) of the CORESET may be equal to zero. Inan example, the wireless device may not receive a MAC-CE activationcommand for a TCI-state for the CORESET. In response to not receivingthe MAC-CE activation command, the wireless device may assume that oneor more DMRS antenna ports for a PDCCH reception in the CORESET is quasico-located with an RS (e.g., SS/PBCH block). In an example, the wirelessdevice may identify the RS during an initial access procedure. In anexample, the wireless device may identify the RS from a most recentrandom-access procedure. In an example, the wireless device may notinitiate the most recent random-access procedure in response toreceiving a PDCCH order triggering a non-contention based random-accessprocedure.

In an example, a base station may provide a wireless device with asingle TCI-state for a CORESET. In an example, the base station mayprovide the single TCI-state by a first higher layer parametertci-StatesPDCCH-ToAddList and/or a second higher layer parametertci-StatesPDCCH-ToReleaseList. In response to being provided with thesingle TCI-state for the CORESET, the wireless device may assume thatone or more DM-RS antenna ports for a PDCCH reception in the CORESET isquasi co-located with one or more DL RSs configured by the singleTCI-state.

In an example, a base station may configure a CORESET for a wirelessdevice. In an example, the base station may provide the wireless devicewith a configuration of at least two TCI-states, by a first higher layerparameter tci-StatesPDCCH-ToAddList and/or a second higher layerparameter tci-StatesPDCCH-ToReleaseList, for the CORESET. In an example,the wireless device may receive the configuration of the at least twoTCI-states from the base station. In an example, the wireless device mayreceive a MAC-CE activation command for at least one of the at least twoTCI-states for the CORESET. In response to the receiving the MAC-CEactivation command for the at least one of the at least two TCI-states,the wireless device may assume that one or more DM-RS antenna ports fora PDCCH reception in the CORESET is quasi co-located with one or more DLRSs configured by the at least one of the at least two TCI-states.

In an example, a base station may configure a CORESET for a wirelessdevice. In an example, a CORESET index (e.g., provided by higher layerparameter controlResourceSetId) of the CORESET may be equal to zero. Inan example, the base station may provide the wireless device with aconfiguration of at least two TCI-states for the CORESET. In an example,the wireless device may receive the configuration of the at least twoTCI-states from the base station. In an example, the wireless device mayreceive a MAC-CE activation command for at least one of the at least twoTCI-states for the CORESET. In an example, in response to the CORESETindex being equal to zero, the wireless device may expect that a QCLtype (e.g., QCL-TypeD) of a first RS (e.g., CSI-RS) in the at least oneof the at least two TCI-states is provided by a second RS (e.g., SS/PBCHblock). In an example, in response to the CORESET index being equal tozero, the wireless device may expect that a QCL type (e.g., QCL-TypeD)of a first RS (e.g., CSI-RS) in the at least one of the at least two TCIstates is spatial QCL-ed with a second RS (e.g., SS/PBCH block).

In an example, a wireless device may receive a MAC-CE activation commandfor at least one of at least two TCI-states for a CORESET. In anexample, a PDSCH may provide the MAC-CE activation command. In anexample, the wireless device may transmit a HARQ-ACK information for thePDSCH in a slot. In an example, when the wireless device receives theMAC-CE activation command for the at least one of the at least twoTCI-states for the CORESET, in response to the transmitting HARQ-ACKinformation in the slot, the wireless device may apply the MAC-CEactivation command X msec (e.g., 3 msec, 5 msec) after the slot. In anexample, when the wireless device applies the MAC-CE activation commandin a second slot, a first BWP may be active in the second slot. Inresponse to the first BWP being active in the second slot, the first BWPmay be an active BWP.

In an example, a base station may configure a wireless device with oneor more DL BWPs in a serving cell. In an example, for a DL BWP of theone or more DL BWPs, the wireless device may be provided by higherlayers with one or more (e.g., 3, 5, 10) search space sets. In anexample, for a search space set of the one or more search space sets,the wireless device may be provided, by a higher layer parameterSearchSpace, at least one of: a search space set index (e.g., providedby higher layer parameter searchSpaceId), an association between thesearch space set and a CORESET (e.g., provided by a higher layerparameter controlResourceSetId); a PDCCH monitoring periodicity of afirst number of slots and a PDCCH monitoring offset of a second numberof slots (e.g., provided by a higher layer parametermonitoringSlotPeriodicityAndOffset); a PDCCH monitoring pattern within aslot, indicating first symbol(s) of the CORESET within the slot forPDCCH monitoring, (e.g., provided by a higher layer parametermonitoringSymbolsWithinSlot); a duration of a third number of slots(e.g., provided by a higher layer parameter duration); a number of PDCCHcandidates; an indication that the search space set is either a commonsearch space set or a UE-specific search space set (e.g., provided by ahigher layer parameter searchSpaceType). In an example, the duration mayindicate a number of slots that the search space set may exist.

In an example, a wireless device may not expect two PDCCH monitoringoccasions on an active DL BWP, for a same search space set or fordifferent search space sets, in a same CORESET to be separated by anon-zero number of symbols that is smaller than the CORESET duration.

In an example, the wireless device may determine a PDCCH monitoringoccasion on an active DL BWP based on the PDCCH monitoring periodicity,the PDCCH monitoring offset, and the PDCCH monitoring pattern within aslot. In an example, for the search space set, the wireless device maydetermine that a PDCCH monitoring occasion exists in a slot. In anexample, the wireless device may monitor at least one PDCCH for thesearch space set for the duration of third number of slots (consecutive)starting from the slot.

In an example, a wireless device may monitor one or more PDCCHcandidates in a UE-specific search space (USS) set on an active DL BWPof a serving cell. In an example, a base station may not configure thewireless device with a carrier indicator field. In response to not beingconfigured with the carrier indicator field, the wireless device maymonitor the one or more PDCCH candidates without the carrier indicatorfield.

In an example, a wireless device may monitor one or more PDCCHcandidates in a USS set on an active DL BWP of a serving cell. In anexample, a base station may configure the wireless device with a carrierindicator field. In response to being configured with the carrierindicator field, the wireless device may monitor the one or more PDCCHcandidates with the carrier indicator field.

In an example, a base station may configure a wireless device to monitorone or more PDCCH candidates with a carrier indicator field in a firstcell. In an example, the carrier indicator field may indicate a secondcell. In an example, the carrier indicator field may correspond to asecond cell. In response to monitoring the one or more PDCCH candidates,in the first cell, with the carrier indicator field indicating thesecond cell, the wireless device may not expect to monitor the one ormore PDCCH candidates on an active DL BWP of the second cell.

In an example, a wireless device may monitor one or more PDCCHcandidates on an active DL BWP of a serving cell. In response to themonitoring the one or more PDCCH candidates on the active DL BWP of theserving cell, the wireless device may monitor the one or more PDCCHcandidates for the serving cell.

In an example, a wireless device may monitor one or more PDCCHcandidates on an active DL BWP of a serving cell. In response to themonitoring the one or more PDCCH candidates on the active DL BWP of theserving cell, the wireless device may monitor the one or more PDCCHcandidates at least for the serving cell. In an example, the wirelessdevice may monitor the one or more PDCCH candidates for the serving celland at least a second serving cell.

In an example, a base station may configure a wireless device with oneor more cells. In an example, when a number of the one or more cells isone, the base station may configure the wireless device for asingle-cell operation. In an example, when a number of the one or morecells is more than one, the base station may configure the wirelessdevice for an operation with a carrier aggregation in a same frequencyband (e.g., intra-band).

In an example, the wireless device may monitor one or more PDCCHcandidates in overlapping PDCCH monitoring occasions in a plurality ofCORESETs on active DL BWP(s) of the one or more cells. In an example,the plurality of the CORESETs may have a different QCL-TypeD property.

In an example, a first PDCCH monitoring occasion in a first CORESET, ofthe plurality of CORESETs, of a first cell of the one or more cells mayoverlap with a second PDCCH monitoring occasion in a second CORESET, ofthe plurality of CORESETs, of the first cell. In an example, thewireless device may monitor at least one first PDCCH candidate in thefirst PDCCH monitoring occasion on an active DL BWP, of the active DLBWP(s), of the first cell. In an example, the wireless device maymonitor at least one second PDCCH candidate in the second PDCCHmonitoring occasion on the active DL BWP, of the active DL BWP(s), ofthe first cell.

In an example, a first PDCCH monitoring occasion in a first CORESET, ofthe plurality of CORESETs, of a first cell of the one or more cells mayoverlap with a second PDCCH monitoring occasion in a second CORESET, ofthe plurality of CORESETs, of a second cell of the one or more cells. Inan example, the wireless device may monitor at least one first PDCCHcandidate in the first PDCCH monitoring occasion on a first active DLBWP, of the active DL BWP(s), of the first cell. In an example, thewireless device may monitor at least one second PDCCH candidate in thesecond PDCCH monitoring occasion on a second active DL BWP, of theactive DL BWP(s), of the second cell.

In an example, a first QCL type property (e.g., QCL-TypeD) of the firstCORESET may be different from a second QCL type property (e.g.,QCL-TypeD) of the second CORESET.

In an example, in response to the monitoring the one or more PDCCHcandidates in the overlapping PDCCH monitoring occasions in theplurality of CORESETs and the plurality of the CORESETs having thedifferent QCL-TypeD property, for a CORESET determination rule, thewireless device may determine a selected CORESET, of the plurality ofthe CORESETs, of a cell of the one or more cells. In an example, inresponse to the determining, the wireless device may monitor at leastone PDCCH candidate, in the overlapping PDCCH monitoring occasions, inthe selected CORESET on an active DL BWP of the cell. In an example, theselected CORESET may be associated with a search space set (e.g.,association provided by a higher layer parameter controlResourceSetId).

In an example, one or more CORESETs of the plurality of CORESETs may beassociated with a common search space (CSS) set. In an example, the oneor more CORESETs of the plurality of CORESETs being associated with theCSS set may comprise that at least one search space set of a CORESET(e.g., association between the at least one search space set and theCORESET provided by a higher layer parameter controlResourceSetId) ofthe one or more CORESETs has at least one PDCCH candidate in theoverlapping PDCCH monitoring occasions and/or in a CSS set.

In an example, the first CORESET may be associated with a first CSS set.In an example, the first CORESET may be associated with a first USS set.In an example, the second CORESET may be associated with a second CSSset. In an example, the second CORESET may be associated with a secondUSS set. In an example, a CORESET (e.g., the first CORESET, the secondCORESET) being associated with a CSS set (e.g., first CSS set, secondCSS set) may comprise that at least one search space of the CORESET isthe CSS set. In an example, a CORESET (e.g., the first CORESET, thesecond CORESET) being associated with an USS set (e.g., first USS set,second USS set) may comprise that at least one search space of theCORESET is the USS set.

In an example, when the first CORESET is associated with the first CSSset and the second CORESET is associated with the second CSS set, theone or more CORESETs may comprise the first CORESET and the secondCORESET.

In an example, when the one or more CORESETs comprises the first CORESETand the second CORESET, the one or more selected cells may comprise thefirst cell and the second cell in response to the first CORESET beingconfigured in the first cell and the second CORESET being configured inthe second cell.

In an example, when the one or more CORESETs comprises the first CORESETand the second CORESET, the one or more selected cells may comprise thefirst cell in response to the first CORESET being configured in thefirst cell and the second CORESET being configured in the first cell. Inan example, the at least one CORESET may comprise the first CORESET andthe second CORESET. In an example, a first search space set of the firstCORESET of the at least one CORESET may be identified by a first searchspace set specific index (e.g., provided by a higher layer parametersearchSpaceId). In an example, the wireless device may monitor the atleast one first PDCCH candidate in the first PDCCH monitoring occasionin the first CORESET associated with the first search space set (e.g.,association provided by a higher layer parameter controlResourceSetId).In an example, a second search space set of the second coreset of the atleast one CORESET may be identified by a second search space setspecific index (e.g., provided by a higher layer parametersearchSpaceId). In an example, the wireless device may monitor the atleast one second PDCCH candidate in the second PDCCH monitoring occasionin the second CORESET associated with the second search space set (e.g.,association provided by a higher layer parameter controlResourceSetId).In an example, the first search space set specific index may be lowerthan the second search space set specific index. In response to thefirst search space set specific index being lower than the second searchspace set specific index, for a CORESET determination rule, the wirelessdevice may select the first search space set. In an example, in responseto the selecting, for the coreset determination rule, the wirelessdevice may monitor the at least one first PDCCH candidate in the firstPDCCH monitoring occasion in the first CORESET on the active DL BWP ofthe first cell. In an example, in response to the selecting, for thecoreset determination rule, the wireless device may stop monitoring theat least one second PDCCH candidate in the second PDCCH monitoringoccasion in the second CORESET on the active DL BWP of the first cell.In an example, in response to the selecting, the wireless device maydrop monitoring the at least one second PDCCH candidate in the secondPDCCH monitoring occasion in the second CORESET on the active DL BWP ofthe first cell.

In an example, the first cell may be identified by a first cell-specificindex. In an example, the second cell may be identified by a secondcell-specific index. In an example, the first cell-specific index may belower than the second cell-specific index. In an example, when the oneor more selected cells comprises the first cell and the second cell, thewireless device may select the first cell in response to the firstcell-specific index being lower than the second cell-specific index.

In an example, when the first CORESET is associated with the first CSSset and the second CORESET is associated with the second USS set, theone or more CORESETs may comprise the first CORESET. In an example, whenthe one or more CORESETs comprises the first CORESET, the one or moreselected cells may comprise the first cell in response to the firstCORESET being configured in the first cell.

In an example, when the first CORESET is associated with the first USSset and the second CORESET is associated with the second CSS set, theone or more CORESETs may comprise the second CORESET. In an example,when the one or more CORESETs comprises the second CORESET, the one ormore selected cells may comprise the first cell in response to thesecond CORESET being configured in the first cell. In an example, whenthe one or more CORESETs comprises the second CORESET, the one or moreselected cells may comprise the second cell in response to the secondCORESET being configured in the second cell.

In an example, the wireless device may determine that the one or moreCORESETs are associated with one or more selected cells of the one ormore cells. In an example, the base station may configure a firstCORESET of the one or more CORESETs in a first cell of the one or moreselected cells. In an example, the base station may configure a secondCORESET of the one or more CORESETs in the first cell. In an example,the base station may configure a third CORESET of the one or moreCORESETs in a second cell of the one or more selected cells. In anexample, the first cell and the second cell may be different.

In an example, the wireless device may receive, from the base station,one or more configuration parameters. The one or more configurationparameters may indicate cell-specific indices (e.g., provided by ahigher layer parameter servCelllndex) for the one or more cells. In anexample, each cell of the one or more cells may be identified by arespective one cell-specific index of the cell-specific indices. In anexample, a cell-specific index of a cell of the one or more selectedcells may be lowest among the cell-specific indices of the one or moreselected cells.

In an example, when the wireless device determines that the one or moreCORESETs are associated with the one or more selected cells of the oneor more cells, for the CORESET determination rule, the wireless devicemay select the cell in response to the cell-specific index of the cellbeing lowest among the cell-specific indices of the one or more selectedcells.

In an example, the base station may configure at least one CORESET ofthe one or more CORESETs in the (selected) cell. In an example, at leastone search space set of the at least one CORESET may have at least onePDCCH candidate in the overlapping PDCCH monitoring occasions and/or maybe a CSS set.

In an example, the one or more configuration parameters may indicatesearch space set specific indices (e.g., provided by a higher layerparameter searchSpaceId) for the at least one search space set of thecell. In an example, each search space set of the at least one searchspace set may be identified by a respective one search space setspecific index of the search space set specific indices. In an example,the wireless device may determine that a search space specific index ofa search space set of the at least one search space set may be thelowest among the search space set specific indices of the at least onesearch space set. In response to the determining that the search spacespecific index of the search space set specific index being the lowestamong the search space set specific indices of the at least one searchspace set, for the CORESET determination rule, the wireless device mayselect the search space set. In an example, the search space set may beassociated with a selected CORESET of the at least one CORESET (e.g.,association provided by a higher layer parameter controlResourceSetId).

In an example, when the wireless device monitors the one or more PDCCHcandidates in the overlapping PDCCH monitoring occasions in theplurality of CORESETs and the plurality of the CORESETs have thedifferent QCL-TypeD property, the wireless device may monitor at leastone PDCCH in the selected CORESET of the plurality of the CORESETs on anactive DL BWP of the cell of the one or more cells in response to theselecting the cell and/or the selecting the search space set associatedwith the selected CORESET. In an example, the wireless device may selectthe selected CORESET associated with the search space set and the cellfor the CORESET determination rule.

In an example, the selected CORESET may have a first QCL-TypeD property.In an example, a second CORESET of the plurality of the CORESETs mayhave a second QCL-TypeD property. In an example, the selected CORESETand the second CORESET may be different.

In an example, the first QCL-TypeD property and the second QCL-TypeDproperty may be the same. In an example, the wireless device may monitorat least one second PDCCH candidate (in the overlapping PDCCH monitoringoccasions) in the second CORESET of the plurality of the CORESETs inresponse to the first QCL-TypeD property of the selected CORESET and thesecond QCL-TypeD property of the second CORESET being the same.

In an example, the first QCL-TypeD property and the second QCL-TypeDproperty may be different. In an example, the wireless device may stopmonitoring at least one second PDCCH candidate (in the overlapping PDCCHmonitoring occasions) in the second CORESET of the plurality of theCORESETs in response to the first QCL-TypeD property of the selectedCORESET and the second QCL-TypeD property of the second CORESET beingdifferent. In an example, the wireless device may drop monitoring atleast one second PDCCH candidate (in the overlapping PDCCH monitoringoccasions) in the second CORESET of the plurality of the CORESETs inresponse to the first QCL-TypeD property of the selected CORESET and thesecond QCL-TypeD property of the second CORESET being different.

In an example, for the CORESET determination rule, a wireless device mayconsider that a first QCL type (e.g., QCL TypeD) property of a first RS(e.g., SS/PBCH block) is different from a second QCL type (e.g., QCLTypeD) property of a second RS (CSI-RS).

In an example, for the CORESET determination rule, a first RS (e.g.,CSI-RS) may be associated (e.g., QCL-ed) with an RS (e.g., SS/PBCHblock) in a first cell. In an example, a second RS (e.g., CSI-RS) may beassociated (e.g., QCL-ed) with the RS in a second cell. In response tothe first RS and the second RS being associated with the RS, thewireless device may consider that a first QCL type (e.g., QCL TypeD)property of the first RS and a second QCL type (e.g., QCL TypeD)property of the second RS are the same.

In an example, the wireless device may determine a number of activeTCI-states from the plurality of CORESETs.

In an example, a wireless device may monitor multiple search space setsassociated with different CORESETs for one or more cells (e.g., for asingle cell operation or for an operation with carrier aggregation in asame frequency band). In an example, at least two monitoring occasionsof at least two search space sets of the multiple search space sets mayoverlap in time (e.g., at least one symbol, at least one slot, subframe,etc.). In an example, the at least two search space sets may beassociated with at least two first CORESETs. The at least two firstCORESETs may have different QCL-TypeD properties. In an example, for theCORESET determination rule, the wireless device may monitor at least onesearch space set associated with a selected CORESET in an active DL BWPof a cell. In an example, the at least one search space set may be a CSSset. In an example, a cell-specific index of the cell may be lowestamong cell-specific indices of the one or more cells comprising thecell. In an example, at least two second CORESETs of the cell maycomprise a CSS set. In response to the at least two second CORESETs ofthe cell comprising the CSS set, the wireless device may select aselected CORESET of the at least two second CORESETs in response to asearch space specific index of a search space set associated with theselected CORESET being the lowest among search space specific indices ofsearch space sets associated with the at least two second CORESETs. Inan example, the wireless device may monitor the search space set in theat least two monitoring occasions.

In an example, the wireless device may determine that the at least twofirst CORESETs may not be associated with a CSS set. In an example, thewireless device may determine that each CORESET of the at least twofirst CORESETs may not be associated with a CSS set. In an example, forthe CORESET determination rule, in response to the determining, thewireless device may monitor at least one search space set associatedwith a selected CORESET in an active DL BWP of a cell. In an example,the at least one search space set may be a USS set. In an example, acell-specific index of the cell may be lowest among cell-specificindices of the one or more cells comprising the cell. In an example, atleast two second CORESETs of the cell may comprise a USS set. Inresponse to the at least two second CORESETs of the cell comprising theUSS set, the wireless device may select a selected CORESET of the atleast two second CORESETs in response to a search space specific indexof a search space set associated with the selected CORESET being thelowest among search space specific indices of search space setsassociated with the at least two second CORESETs. In an example, thewireless device monitors the search space set in the at least twomonitoring occasions.

In an example, a base station may indicate, to a wireless device, aTCI-state for a PDCCH reception for a CORESET of a serving cell bysending a TCI-state indication for UE-specific PDCCH MAC-CE. In anexample, when a MAC entity of the wireless device receives a TCI-stateindication for UE-specific PDCCH MAC-CE on/for a serving cell, the MACentity may indicate to lower layers (e.g., PHY) the informationregarding the TCI-state indication for the UE-specific PDCCH MAC-CE.

In an example, a TCI-state indication for UE-specific PDCCH MAC-CE maybe identified by a MAC PDU subheader with LCID. The TCI-state indicationfor UE-specific PDCCH MAC-CE may have a fixed size of 16 bits comprisingone or more fields. In an example, the one or more fields may comprise aserving cell ID, CORESET ID, TCI-state ID and a reserved bit.

In an example, the serving cell ID may indicate the identity of theserving cell for which the TCI-state indication for the UE-specificPDCCH MAC-CE applies. The length of the serving cell ID may be n bits(e.g., n=5 bits).

In an example, the CORESET ID may indicate a control resource set. Thecontrol resource set may be identified with a control resource set ID(e.g., ControlResourceSetId). The TCI-state is being indicated to thecontrol resource set ID for which. The length of the CORESET ID may ben3 bits (e.g., n3=4 bits).

In an example, the TCI-state ID may indicate a TCI-state identified byTCI-Stateld. The TCI-state may be applicable to the control resource setidentified by the CORESET ID. The length of the TCI-state ID may be n4bits (e.g., n4=6 bits).

An information element ControlResourceSet may be used to configure atime/frequency control resource set (CORESET) in which to search fordownlink control information.

An information element TCI-State may associate one or two DL referencesignals with a corresponding quasi-colocation (QCL) type. Theinformation element TCI-State may comprise one or more fields includingTCI-Stateld and QCL-Info. The QCL-Info may comprise one or more secondfields. The one or more second fields may comprise serving cell index,BWP ID, a reference signal index (e.g., SSB-index,NZP-CSI-RS-ResourcelD), and a QCL Type (e.g., QCL-typeA, QCL-typeB,QCL-typeC, QCL-typeD). In an example, the TCI-StatelD may identify aconfiguration of a TCI-state.

In an example, the serving cell index may indicate a serving cell inwhich a reference signal indicated by the reference signal index islocated in. When the serving cell index is absent in an informationelement TCI-State, the information element TCI-State may apply to aserving cell in which the information element TCI-State is configured.The reference signal may be located on a second serving cell other thanthe serving cell in which the information element TCI-State isconfigured only if the QCL-Type is configured as first type (e.g.,TypeD, TypeA, TypeB). In an example, the BWP ID may indicate a downlinkBWP of the serving cell in which the reference signal is located in.

An information element SearchSpace may define how/where to search forPDCCH candidates in a search space. The search space may be identifiedby a searchSpaceId field in the information element SearchSpace. Eachsearch space may be associated with a control resource set (e.g.,ControlResourceSet). The control resource set may be identified by acontrolResourceSetId field in the information element SearchSpace. ThecontrolResourceSetId field may indicate the control resource set(CORESET) applicable for the SearchSpace.

In an example, a base station may use an information element (IE)CSI-AperiodicTriggerStateList to configure a wireless device with one ormore aperiodic trigger states (e.g., 1, 64, 128 aperiodic triggerstates). A codepoint of a CSI request field in a DCI may be associatedwith (or indicate) an aperiodic trigger state of the one or moreaperiodic trigger states. In an example, the aperiodic trigger state maycomprise one or more report configurations (e.g., 1, 8, 16 reportconfigurations, provided by a higher layer parameterassociatedReportConfigInfoList). Based on receiving the DCI with the CSIrequest field indicating the aperiodic trigger state, the wirelessdevice may perform measurement of CSI-RS and aperiodic reportingaccording to the one or more report configurations (e.g., in theassociatedReportConfigInfoList) for the aperiodic trigger state.

In an example, a report configuration (e.g., provided by a higher layerparameter CSI-AssociatedReportConfigInfo) of the one or more reportconfigurations may be identified/associated with a report configurationindex (e.g., provided by a higher layer parameter CSI-ReportConfigId).In an example, the report configuration may comprise one or more CSI-RSresources (e.g., 1, 8, 16 CSI-RS resources). In an example, an aperiodicCSI-RS resource of the one or more CSI-RS resources may be associatedwith a TCI state (provided by a higher layer parameter qcl-info in IECSI-AperiodicTriggerStateList) of one or more TCI-State configurations.The TCI state may provide a QCL assumption (e.g., an RS, an RS source,SS/PBCH block, CSI-RS). The TCI state may provide a QCL type (e.g.,QCL-TypeA, QCL-TypeD, etc.).

In an example, the wireless device may receive a DCI with a CSI requestfield from a base station. The wireless device may receive the DCI in aPDCCH. The wireless device may receive the DCI when monitoring thePDCCH. In an example, the DCI with the CSI request field mayinitiate/indicate/trigger an aperiodic trigger state of the one or moreaperiodic trigger states. In an example, a codepoint of the CSI requestfield in the DCI may indicate the aperiodic trigger state. In anexample, the aperiodic trigger state may comprise one or more reportconfigurations (e.g., a list of NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSet). In an example,a report configuration (e.g., NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSet) of the one or morereport configurations may comprise one or more CSI-RS resources (e.g.,aperiodic CSI-RS resources, NZP-CSI-RS-Resources).

In an example, the base station may not configure the reportconfiguration with a higher layer parameter trs-Info. In an example,configuring the report configuration without the higher layer parametertrs-Info may comprise that a first antenna port for a first aperiodicCSI-RS resource of the one or more CSI-RS resources is different from asecond antenna port for a second aperiodic CSI-RS resource of the one ormore CSI resources. In an example, configuring the report configurationwithout the higher layer parameter trs-Info may comprise that an antennaport for each aperiodic CSI-RS resource of the one or more CSI-RSresources is different. In an example, the base station may notconfigure the report configuration with a higher layer parameterrepetition. In an example, a scheduling offset between a last symbol ofthe PDCCH carrying the DCI and a first symbol of the one or more CSI-RSresources in the report configuration may be smaller than a secondthreshold (e.g., beamSwitchTiming). In an example, the wireless devicemay report the second threshold. In an example, the second threshold maybe a first value (e.g., 14, 28, 48 symbols).

In an example, an aperiodic CSI-RS resource of the one or more CSI-RSresources may be associated with a first TCI state of the one or moreTCI-State configurations. In an example, the first TCI state mayindicate at least one first RS. In an example, the first TCI state mayindicate at least one first QCL type. In an example, the aperiodicCSI-RS resource being associated with the first TCI state may comprisethat the wireless device receives an aperiodic CSI-RS of the aperiodicCSI-RS resource with the at least one first RS (indicated by the firstTCI state) with respect to the at least one first QCL type indicated bythe first TCI state.

In an example, the base station may transmit a downlink signal with asecond TCI state. In an example, the second TCI state may indicate atleast one second RS. In an example, the second TCI state may indicate atleast one second QCL type. The wireless device may receive the downlinksignal in one or more first symbols. The wireless device may receive anaperiodic CSI-RS for the aperiodic CSI-RS resource in one or more secondsymbols. In an example, the one or more first symbols and the one ormore second symbols may overlap (e.g., fully or partially). In anexample, the downlink signal and the aperiodic CSI-RS (or the aperiodicCSI-RS resource) may overlap based on the one or more first symbols andthe one or more second symbols overlapping.

In an example, the downlink signal and the aperiodic CSI-RS (or theaperiodic CSI-RS resource) may overlap in a time duration. In anexample, the time duration may be at least one symbol. In an example,the time duration may be at least one slot. In an example, the timeduration may be at least one subframe. In an example, the time durationmay be at least one mini-slot. In an example, the time duration may bethe one or more second symbols. In an example, the time duration may bethe one or more first symbols.

In an example, the downlink signal may be a PDSCH scheduled with anoffset larger than or equal to a first threshold (e.g.,Threshold-Sched-Offset, timeDurationForQCL). In an example, the downlinksignal may be a second aperiodic CSI-RS scheduled with an offset largerthan or equal a second threshold (e.g., beamSwitchTiming) when thesecond threshold is a first value (e.g., 14, 28, 48 symbols). In anexample, the downlink signal may be an RS (e.g., periodic CSI-RS,semi-persistent CSI-RS, SS/PBCH block etc.).

In an example, when the scheduling offset between the last symbol of thePDCCH and the first symbol is smaller than the second threshold, basedon the downlink signal with the second TCI state and the aperiodicCSI-RS (or the aperiodic CSI-RS resource) overlapping, the wirelessdevice may apply a QCL assumption provided/indicated by the second TCIstate when receiving the aperiodic CSI-RS. In an example, the applyingthe QCL assumption (provided/indicated by the second TCI state) whenreceiving the aperiodic CSI may comprise that the wireless devicereceives the aperiodic CSI-RS with the at least one second RS (indicatedby the second TCI state) with respect to the at least one second QCLtype indicated by the second TCI state.

In an example, a scheduling offset between a last symbol of the PDCCHcarrying the DCI and a first symbol of the one or more CSI-RS resourcesin the report configuration may be equal to or larger than a secondthreshold (e.g., beamSwitchTiming). In an example, the wireless devicemay report the second threshold. In an example, the second threshold maybe a first value (e.g., 14, 28, 48 symbols). Based on the schedulingoffset being equal to or larger than the second threshold, the wirelessdevice may apply a QCL assumption (provided by the first TCI state) forthe aperiodic CSI-RS resource of the one or more CSI-RS resources in thereport configuration. In an example, the applying the QCL assumption(provided by the first TCI state) for the aperiodic CSI-RS resource maycomprise that the wireless device receives the aperiodic CSI-RS of theaperiodic CSI-RS resource with the at least one first RS (indicated bythe first TCI state) with respect to the at least one first QCL typeindicated by the first TCI state.

In an example, two transmission schemes for uplink may be supported forphysical uplink shared channel (PUSCH): codebook based transmission andnon-codebook based transmission. A wireless device may be configuredwith codebook based transmission when the higher layer parametertxConfig in pusch-Config is set to ‘codebook’. The wireless device maybe configured with non-codebook based transmission when the higher layerparameter txConfig is set to ‘nonCodebook’. When the higher layerparameter txConfig is not configured, the wireless device may not expectto be scheduled by DCI format 0_1 or 0_2. When PUSCH is scheduled by DCIformat 0_0, the PUSCH transmission may be based on a single antennaport. Except when the higher layer parameterenableDefaultBeamPlForPUSCH0_0 is set ‘enabled’, the wireless device maynot expect PUSCH scheduled by DCI format 0_0 in a BWP without configuredPUCCH resource with PUCCH-SpatialRelationInfo in frequency range 2 inRRC connected mode.

For codebook based transmission, in an example, PUSCH may be scheduledby DCI format 0_0, DCI format 0_1, DCI format 0_2 or semi-staticallyconfigured. When this PUSCH is scheduled by DCI format 0_1, DCI format0_2, or semi-statically configured, the wireless device may determineits PUSCH transmission precoder based on a SRS resource indicator (SRI),a transmit precoding matrix indicator (TPMI) and a transmission rank,where the SRI, the TPMI and the transmission rank may be given by DCIfields of ‘SRS resource indicator’ and Trecoding information and numberof layers' for DCI format 0_1 and 0_2 or given by srs-ResourceIndicatorand precodingAndNumberOfLayers. In an example, the SRS-ResourceSet(s)applicable for PUSCH scheduled by DCI format 0_1 and DCI format 0_2 maybe defined by the entries of the higher layer parametersrs-ResourceSetToAddModList andsrs-ResourceSetToAddModList-ForDCIFormat0_2 in SRS-Config, respectively.The TPMI may be used to indicate the precoder to be applied over thelayers {0 . . . v-1} and that corresponds to an SRS resource selected bythe SRI when multiple SRS resources are configured, or when a single SRSresource is configured TPMI is used to indicate the precoder to beapplied over the layers {0 . . . v-1} and that corresponds to the SRSresource. The transmission precoder may be selected from the uplinkcodebook that has a number of antenna ports equal to higher layerparameter nrofSRS-Ports in SRS-Config. When the wireless device isconfigured with the higher layer parameter txConfig set to ‘codebook’,the wireless device may be configured with at least one SRS resource. Inan example, the indicated SRI in slot n may be associated with the mostrecent transmission of an SRS resource identified by the SRI, where theSRS resource is prior to the PDCCH carrying the SRI.

For non-codebook based transmission, in an example, PUSCH may bescheduled by DCI format 0_0, DCI format 0_1, DCI format 0_2 orsemi-statically configured. When this PUSCH is scheduled by DCI format0_1, DCI format 0_2, or semi-statically configured, the wireless devicemay determine its PUSCH precoder and transmission rank based on an SRIwhen multiple SRS resources are configured, where the SRI is given by aDCI field of ‘SRS resource indicator’ in DCI for DCI format 0_1 and DCIformat 0_2, or the SRI is given by srs-ResourceIndicator. In an example,the SRS-ResourceSet(s) applicable for PUSCH scheduled by DCI format 0_1and DCI format 0_2 may be defined by the entries of the higher layerparameter srs-ResourceSetToAddModList andsrs-ResourceSetToAddModList-ForDCIFormat0_2 in SRS-Config, respectively.The wireless device may use one or multiple SRS resources for SRStransmission, where, in a SRS resource set, the maximum number of SRSresources which may be configured to the wireless device forsimultaneous transmission in the same symbol and the maximum number ofSRS resources may the wireless device's capabilities. In an example, theSRS resources transmitted simultaneously may occupy the same RBs. In anexample, at least one SRS port for an SRS resource may be configured. Inan example, one SRS resource set may be configured with higher layerparameter usage in SRS-ResourceSet set to ‘nonCodebook’. The indicatedSRI in slot n may be associated with the most recent transmission of SRSresource(s) identified by the SRI, where the SRS transmission is priorto the PDCCH carrying the SRI. The wireless device may performone-to-one mapping from the indicated SRI(s) to the indicateddemodulation RS (DMRS) ports(s) and their corresponding PUSCH layers {0. . . v-1} given by DCI format 0_1 or by configuredGrantConfig inincreasing order.

FIG. 20 shows an example of transmission and reception with multipletransmission reception points (TRPs) and/or multiple panels. In anexample, a base station may be equipped with more than one TRP (e.g.,TRP 1 and TRP 2). A wireless device may be equipped with more than onepanel (e.g., Panel 1 and Panel 2). Transmission and reception withmultiple TRPs and/or multiple panels may improve system throughputand/or transmission robustness for a wireless communication in a highfrequency (e.g., above 6 GHz). For example, a TRP of a plurality of TRPs(or a coreset pool of a plurality of coreset pools) and a panel of aplurality of panels may be associated. For example, the wireless devicemay receive via the TRP and transmit via the panel that is associatedwith the TRP when the wireless device communicates with a base stationvia a TRP. For example, a first TRP of the plurality of TRPs may beassociated with a first panel of the plurality of panels based onRRC/MAC-CE/DCI signaling. For example, a TRP with an index may beassociated with a panel with the index. For example, a TRP with acoreset pool index may be associated with a panel configured with thecoreset pool index. For example, a TRP with a coreset pool index may beassociated with a panel with one or more PUCCH resources configured withthe coreset pool index.

In an example, a TRP of multiple TRPs of the base station may beidentified by at least one of: a TRP identifier (ID), a cell index, or areference signal index. In an example, a TRP ID of a TRP may comprise acontrol resource set group (or pool) index (e.g., CORESETPoolIndex) of acontrol resource set group from which a DCI is transmitted from the basestation on a control resource set. In an example, a TRP ID of a TRP maycomprise a TRP index indicated in the DCI. In an example, a TRP ID of aTRP may comprise a TCI state group index of a TCI state group. A TCIstate group may comprise at least one TCI state with which the wirelessdevice receives the downlink transport blocks (TB s), or with which thebase station transmits the downlink TBs.

In an example, a base station may be equipped with multiple TRPs. Thebase station may transmit to a wireless device one or more RRC messagescomprising configuration parameters of a plurality of CORESETs on a cell(or a BWP of the cell). A CORESET of the plurality of CORESETs may beidentified with a CORESET index and may be associated with (orconfigured with) a CORESET pool (or group) index. One or more CORESETs,of the plurality of CORESETs, having a same CORESET pool index mayindicate that DCIs received on the one or more CORESETs are transmittedfrom a same TRP of a plurality of TRPs of the base station. The wirelessdevice may determine receiving beams (or spatial domain filters) forPDCCHs/PDSCHs based on a TCI indication (e.g., DCI) and a CORESET poolindex associated with a CORESET for the DCI.

In an example, a wireless device may receive multiple PDCCHs schedulingfully/partially/non-overlapped PDSCHs in time and frequency domain, whenthe wireless device receives one or more RRC messages (e.g.,PDCCH-Config IE) comprising a first CORESET pool index (e.g.,CORESETPoolIndex) value and a second COESET pool index inControlResourceSet IE. The wireless device may determine the receptionof full/partially overlapped PDSCHs in time domain when PDCCHs thatschedule two PDSCHs are associated to different ControlResourceSetshaving different values of CORESETPoolIndex.

In an example, a wireless device may assume (or determine) that theControlResourceSet is assigned with CORESETPoolIndex as 0 for aControlResourceSet without CORESETPoolIndex. When the wireless device isscheduled with full/partially/non-overlapped PDSCHs in time andfrequency domain, scheduling information for receiving a PDSCH isindicated and carried by the corresponding PDCCH. The wireless device isexpected to be scheduled with the same active BWP and the same SCS. Inan example, a wireless device can be scheduled with at most twocodewords simultaneously when the wireless device is scheduled withfull/partially overlapped PDSCHs in time and frequency domain.

In an example, when PDCCHs that schedule two PDSCHs are associated todifferent ControlResourceSets having different values ofCORESETPoolIndex, the wireless device is allowed to the followingoperations: for any two HARQ process IDs in a given scheduled cell, ifthe wireless device is scheduled to start receiving a first PDSCHstarting in symbol j by a PDCCH associated with a value ofCORESETpoolIndex ending in symbol i, the wireless device can bescheduled to receive a PDSCH starting earlier than the end of the firstPDSCH with a PDCCH associated with a different value of CORESETpoolIndexthat ends later than symbol i; in a given scheduled cell, the wirelessdevice can receive a first PDSCH in slot i, with the correspondingHARQ-ACK assigned to be transmitted in slot j, and a second PDSCHassociated with a value of CORESETpoolIndex different from that of thefirst PDSCH starting later than the first PDSCH with its correspondingHARQ-ACK assigned to be transmitted in a slot before slot j.

In an example, if a wireless device configured by higher layer parameterPDCCH-Config that contains two different values of CORESETPoolIndex inControlResourceSet, for both cases, when tci-PresentInDCI is set to‘enabled’ and tci-PresentInDCI is not configured in RRC connected mode,if the offset between the reception of the DL DCI and the correspondingPDSCH is less than the threshold timeDurationForQCL, the wireless devicemay assume that the DM-RS ports of PDSCH associated with a value ofCORESETPoolIndex of a serving cell are quasi co-located with the RS(s)with respect to the QCL parameter(s) used for PDCCH quasi co-locationindication of the CORESET associated with a monitored search space withthe lowest CORESET-ID among CORESETs, which are configured with the samevalue of CORESETPoolIndex as the PDCCH scheduling that PDSCH, in thelatest slot in which one or more CORESETs associated with the same valueof CORESETPoolIndex as the PDCCH scheduling that PDSCH within the activeBWP of the serving cell are monitored by the wireless device. If theoffset between the reception of the DL DCI and the corresponding PDSCHis less than the threshold timeDurationForQCL and at least oneconfigured TCI states for the serving cell of scheduled PDSCH containsthe ‘QCL-TypeD’, and at least one TCI codepoint indicates two TCIstates, the wireless device may assume that the DM-RS ports of PDSCH ofa serving cell are quasi co-located with the RS(s) with respect to theQCL parameter(s) associated with the TCI states corresponding to thelowest codepoint among the TCI codepoints containing two different TCIstates.

In an example, a wireless device, when configured with multiple panels,may determine to activate (or select) one of the multiple panels toreceive downlink signals/channels transmitted from one of multiple TRPsof the base station. The activation/selection of one of the multiplepanels may be based on receiving downlink signaling indicating theactivation/selection or be automatically performed based on measuringdownlink channel qualities of one or more reference signals transmittedfrom the base station.

In an example, the wireless device may apply a spatial domain filter totransmit from a panel of the multiple panels to one of the multiple TRPsof the base station, the panel and the spatial domain filter beingdetermined based on at least one of: an UL TCI indication of a DCI, apanel ID in the DCI, a SRI indication of a DCI, a CORESET pool index ofa CORESET for receiving the DCI, and the like.

In an example, when receiving a DCI indicating an uplink grant, thewireless device may determine a panel and a transmission beam (orspatial domain transmission filter) on the panel. The panel may beexplicitly indicated by a panel ID comprised in the DCI. The panel maybe implicitly indicated by an SRS ID (or an SRS group/pool index), a ULTCI pool index of a UL TCI for uplink transmission, and/or a CORESETpool index of a CORESET for receiving the DCI.

In an example, a wireless device may complete a beam failure recovery(BFR) procedure for a primary cell of a first cell group or a primarycell of a second cell group (e.g., PSCell, SPCell) or a secondary cell.The beam failure recovery procedure may be for a cell or a coreset poolof the cell. For example, the wireless device may complete the beamfailure recovery procedure by receiving an explicit or implementacknowledgement from a base station. For example, when the wireless maytrigger a contention-free random access procedure for the BFR procedure.The wireless device may consider receiving a DCI, based on a first RNTIsuch as C-RNTI, comprising resource assignment in response to a preambletransmission of the contention-free random access, as an implicitacknowledgement of the BFR (e.g., transmission of one or more candidatebeams). For example, when the wireless device may trigger a contentionbased random access procedure for the BFR procedure, the wireless devicemay consider receiving a DCI, based on the first RNTI and via a recoverycoreset (e.g., identified by recoveryCoresetld) or a recovery searchspace (e.g., identified by recoverySearchSpaceId), as an implicitacknowledgement of the BFR procedure. In an example, the wireless devicemay transmit a scheduling request (e.g., a dedicated SR) to initiate theBFR procedure. The wireless device may receive an UL grant, comprising aHARQ process ID, scheduling a PUSCH. The wireless device may transmit acandidate beam via the PUSCH. When the wireless device receives anotherUL grant, comprising the HARQ process ID with NID bit toggled, thewireless device may consider the BFR procedure is completed.

After the BFR is successfully completed, the wireless device may performthe followings for various coresets and PUCCH resources. For example,after K symbols after completing the BFR (e.g., K=28), the wirelessdevice may transmit a PUCCH based on a PUCCH resource, wherein a spatialdomain filter parameter of the PUCCH may be determined based on a lastPRACH transmission if the BFR procedure is performed based on a randomaccess procedure. For example, after K symbols after completing the BFR(e.g., K=28), the wireless device may determine a TCI state of a coreset#0 (a coreset with index=0) as a first TCI state used for the recoverycoreset if the BFR procedure is performed based on a random accessprocedure. For example, when the wireless device may have transmitted acandidate beam via a PUSCH (e.g., the BFR is triggered by transmitting aSR), after K symbols after completing the BFR (e.g., K=28), the wirelessdevice may determine a second TCI state of a coreset (e.g., an activeBWP of a cell of the BFR), based on the candidate beam. For example,when the wireless device may have transmitted a candidate beam via aPUSCH (e.g., the BFR is triggered by transmitting a SR), after K symbolsafter completing the BFR (e.g., K=28), the wireless device may determinea second TCI state of a PUCCH resource based on the candidate beam.

Note that coresets and/or PUCCH resources mentioned in above are limitedto one or more coresets and/or one or more PUCCH resources configuredfor active DL/UL BWP of a cell where the BFR occurs for the cell or acandidate beam for the cell has been reported.

In an example, a TCI state of a coreset may be determined, after Ksymbols after completing the BFR, based on a TCI state used formonitoring a RAR or used for a recovery coreset if the BFR has beenperformed based on a random access procedure, or a second TCI based on acandidate beam. In an example, a TCI state of a PUCCH resource may bedetermined, after K symbols after completing the BFR, based on a TCIstate used for a preamble transmission if the BFR has been performedbased on a random access procedure, or a second TCI based on a candidatebeam.

In an example, a base station and a wireless device may support a secondmode (e.g., second TCI indication mechanism, a second spatial domainfilter update mechanism, a second type, a common beam update,beamUpadate-Type2) to update and/or apply a TCI state for a downlinkchannel or an uplink channel. In a second mode, a TCI state (e.g., a DLTCI, a common DL TCI state, a common DL TCI) may be applied to one ormore downlink channels such as PDCCH and PDSCH. A second TCI state(e.g., an UL TCI, a common UL TCI state, a common UL TCI) may be appliedto one or more uplink channels such as PUSCH and PUCCH. The TCI statemay be same as the second TCI state. Each TCI state may be different perserving cell. A TCI state may be shared over one or more serving cells.For example, a base station may indicate a DL TCI state (e.g., DL commonbeam, a separate DL TCI state, a joint DL TCI state) for downlinkchannels/signals such as PDCCH, PDSCH and CSI-RS transmission. The basestation may indicate the DL TCI state via a DCI or a MAC CE. The basestation may update the DL TCI state via another DCI or another MAC-CE.The base station may indicate a UL TCI state (e.g., UL common beam, aseparate UL TCI state, a joint UL TCI state) for uplink channels/signalssuch as PUCCH, PUSCH and SRS. The base station may indicate the UL TCIvia a DCI or a MAC CE. The base station may update the UL TCI state viaanother DCI or another MAC-CE. For example, the base station mayindicate a first DL TCI state for downlink for a first coreset pool anda second DL TCI state for downlink for a second coreset pool, when thewireless device is configured with a plurality of coreset pools. Whenthe wireless device is configured with a single coreset pool or notconfigured with a coreset pool, the wireless device may apply the DL TCIstate for a cell. In an example, the base station may indicate aplurality of DL TCI states for downlink. The base station may indicate aplurality of UL TCI states for uplink. A DL TCI state may be same as aUL TCI state where a common beam may be used for both downlink anduplink.

The base station may transmit one or more RRC messages comprisingconfiguration parameters. The configuration parameters may indicate aset of TCI states for downlink and uplink or a first set of TCI statesfor downlink and a second set of TCI states for uplink. The base stationmay configure a joint set of TCI states for downlink and uplink of acell. The base station may configure separate set of TCI states fordownlink of the cell and the uplink of the cell respectively. Forexample, the second mode may not be applied to a supplemental uplink ofthe cell, if the supplemental uplink is configured/associated with thecell.

FIG. 21 shows an example of a second mode to update and/or apply a TCIstate for downlink of a cell or uplink of the cell. The base station maytransmit one or more RRC messages or MAC CE messages toindicate/comprise configuration parameters. The configuration parametersmay comprise/indicate at least one set of TCI states. For example, whena single or joint TCI state is applied for downlink of a cell and uplinkof the cell jointly/unified manner, the configuration parametersindicate/comprise a set of TCI states for the cell. The set of TCIstates may be applied to downlink and uplink of the cell. When a firstTCI state of downlink of the cell may be independently indicated orseparately indicated or separately configured or separately enabled froma second TCI state of uplink of the cell, the configuration parametersmay indicate a first set of TCI states for the downlink and a second setof TCI states for the uplink of the cell respectively. For a notation, aDL TCI state may refer a TCI state used for receiving downlinksignals/channels of a cell when the base station independently indicatesTCI states for DL and UL of the cell. Similarly, a UL TCI may refer aTCI state used for transmitting uplink signals/channels of the cell whenindependent indication is used. When a joint indication between DL andUL of the cell is used (e.g., a common TCI is applied to downlink anduplink), a joint TCI state may refer a TCI state used for both downlinksignals/channels of the cell and uplink signals/channels of the cell.

In an example, a TCI state (e.g., a DL TCI state, a UL TCI state or ajoint TCI state) may comprise at least one source RS, where the at leastone source RS may provide a reference (e.g., a spatial-domain reference,a reference for a QCL type and/or a spatial relation, or a QCLassumption for the wireless device, etc.) for determining a QCL(relationship) and/or a spatial (domain) filter. In an example, the atleast one TCI state (e.g., a DL TCI state, a UL TCI state or a joint TCIstate) may indicate (e.g., be associated with, or comprise, etc.) atleast one TRP ID (e.g., a cell index, a reference signal index, aCORESET group (or pool) index (e.g., CORESETPoolIndex), or a CORESETgroup (or pool) index of a CORESET group from which the at least one TCIstate is indicated/signaled, etc.), where the at least one source RS(e.g., transmitted from a TRP identified by the at least one TRP ID) mayprovide a reference (e.g., a spatial-domain reference, a reference for aQCL type and/or a spatial relation, or a QCL assumption for the wirelessdevice, etc.) for determining a QCL (relationship) and/or a spatial(domain) filter. For example, a TCI state may be indicated for downlinkand/or uplink for a TRP or a panel of a cell. For example, for a cell, afirst TCI state may be used for a first TRP/panel and a second TCI statemay be used for a second TRP/panel. For example, a TCI may be indicatedfor a cell regardless of a plurality of coreset pools or a singlecoreset pool (or multi-TRPs or a single TRP). A single TCI state may beused for a plurality of serving cells with a same coreset pool index. Asingle TCI state may be used for a plurality of serving ells regardlessof coreset pool index. A single TCI state may be use for both downlinkand uplink channels/signals. A single TCI may be used only for downlinkor uplink operation.

In an example, one or more TCI states (e.g., M TCI states) may be usedfor downlink signals/channels of a cell. One or more reference signalsof the one or more TCI states may provide common QCL information atleast for reception (e.g., device-dedicated reception, UE-dedicatedreception, etc.) on a PDSCH and one or more CORESETs in a serving cell(e.g., an activated serving-cell (configured with a PDCCH monitoring),or a component carrier (CC), etc.). The common QCL information may referthat a QCL property is shared or commonly used for a plurality ofdownlink/uplink channels/signals such as PDCCH/PDSCH for downlink andPUSCH/PUCCH for uplink. Similarly, one or more TCI states (e.g., N TCIstates) may be used for uplink signals/channels of a cell. One or moreTCI states (e.g., M TCI states) may be used for downlinksignals/channels of a TRP of a cell. One or more reference signals ofthe one or more TCI states may provide common QCL information at leastfor reception (e.g., device-dedicated reception, UE-dedicated reception,etc.) on a PDSCH and one or more CORESETs in a TRP of a serving cell(e.g., an activated serving-cell (configured with a PDCCH monitoring),or a component carrier (CC), etc.). One or more reference signals of theone or more TCI states may provide common QCL information at least forreception (e.g., device-dedicated reception, UE-dedicated reception,etc.) on a PDSCH and one or more CORESETs in a TRP/panel of a pluralityof serving cells (e.g., a plurality of activated serving-cell(configured with a PDCCH monitoring), or a plurality of componentcarriers (CCs), etc.). Similarly, one or more TCI states (e.g., N TCIstates) may be used for uplink signals/channels of a TRP/panel of acell. One or more TCI states (e.g., N TCI states) may be used for uplinksignals/channels of a TRP of a plurality of cells. One or more referencesignals of the one or more TCI states may provide common QCL informationat least for transmission (e.g., device-dedicated transmission,UE-dedicated transmission, etc.) on a PUSCH and one or more PUCCHresources in a TRP/panel of a plurality of serving cells (e.g., aplurality of activated serving-cell (configured with a PDCCHmonitoring), or a plurality of component carriers (CCs), etc.).

In an example, the common QCL information may be applied to at least oneCSI-RS resource, e.g., for CSI feedback/reporting, for beam management(configured with a parameter, e.g., repetition), for tracking(configured with a parameter, e.g., trs-Info). In an example, the commonQCL information may be applied to determining a PDSCH default beam,e.g., in response to a mode (e.g., the second mode, etc.) for TCIindication (being configured/indicated, etc.) based on the at least onejoint TCI. In an example, the wireless device may determine a PDSCHdefault beam as identical to an indicated (e.g., configured, activated,updated, or selected, etc.) (joint) TCI states, e.g., of the M (joint)TCIs, e.g., in response to a mode (e.g., the second mode, etc.) for TCIindication (being configured/indicated, etc.) based on the at least oneTCI state. In an example, the PDSCH default beam may be used for a PDSCHreception based on certain condition(s), e.g., when a time offsetbetween a reception of a DCI scheduling a PDSCH and a reception of thePDSCH is equal to or lower than a threshold (e.g.,Threshold-Sched-Offset), when a CORESET delivering a DCI scheduling aPDSCH is not configured with a higher layer parameter (e.g.,TCI-PresentInDCI), when a higher layer parameter (e.g.,TCI-PresentInDCI) associated with a CORESET delivering a DCI schedulinga PDSCH is not enabled (e.g. not set as “enabled”, not turned on, ordisabled), when an explicit signaling from the base station for enablingthe PDSCH default beam is given, or based on apre-defined/pre-configured rule, etc.

The PDSCH default beam (e.g., for the second mode for TCI indication),as identical to an indicated (e.g., configured, activated, updated, orselected, etc.) (joint) TCI state, e.g., of the M (joint) TCI states,may be different (e.g., independent, or separately, etc.) from a firstPDSCH default beam for the first mode which may be as identical to asecond TCI-state or a second QCL assumption applied for a CORESET with alowest ID (e.g., CORESET-specific index being the lowest) or asidentical to a third TCI-state with a lowest ID (e.g., among activatedTCI-states in a BWP), e.g., TCI-state ID being the lowest among activeTCI-states in a BWP. In an example, a wireless device (e.g., the firstwireless device, or the second wireless device, etc.) may receive anindication, e.g., from the base station, etc., of applying a method fordetermining a PDSCH default beam, where the method may comprise at leastone of: a first method for determining a PDSCH default beam, based onthe performing the default PDSCH RS selection, etc., e.g., as identicalto a second TCI-state or a second QCL assumption applied for a CORESETwith a lowest ID (e.g., CORESET-specific index being the lowest) or asidentical to a third TCI-state with a lowest ID (e.g., among activatedTCI-states in a BWP), e.g., TCI-state ID being the lowest among activeTCI-states in a BWP, e.g., as applied based on the first mode for TCIstate indication, and a second method for determining a PDSCH defaultbeam as being identical to an indicated (e.g., configured, activated,updated, or selected, etc.) (joint) TCI state, e.g., of the M (joint)TCI states, e.g., as applied based on the second mode for TCI stateindication, etc.

In an example, the indication of applying a method for determining aPDSCH default beam, e.g., where the indication may select one methodamong at least the first method, and the second method, etc., may bereceived via an RRC message. In an example, the indication of applying amethod for determining a PDSCH default beam, e.g., where the indicationmay select one method among at least the first method, and the secondmethod, etc., may be received via a MAC-CE message (e.g., and/or adynamic indication via a DCI, etc.). Example embodiments may improve aflexibility and efficiency in a communication network (e.g., comprisingat least a base station and a wireless device, etc.) by selectivelyapplying a mode for TCI indication over at least one channel (e.g., acontrol channel, a data channel, and a shared channel, etc.) for awireless device, and/or by selectively applying a method for determininga PDSCH default beam, e.g., based on the base station's efficientoperational strategy. Example embodiments may reduce an overhead and alatency in control signaling for TCI indication, based on applying asingle TCI-state over multiple channels (e.g., a downlink controlchannel and a downlink shared channel, etc.), e.g., based on the secondmode for TCI indication.

In an example, reference signals of N TCI states (e.g., UL-TCIs, orUL-TCI states, etc.), where N is one or an integer greater than zero,may provide a reference for determining common uplink Tx spatial(domain) filter(s) at least for dynamic-grant-based (or configured-grantbased) PUSCH and one or more (device-dedicated, e.g., UL-dedicated)PUCCH resources in a CC (e.g., a serving-cell, etc.). In an example, oneor more PUCCH resources of a cell may be protected (e.g., restricted, orkept, etc.) from being affected by the reference for determining commonuplink Tx spatial (domain) filter(s). In an example, the common uplinkTx spatial (domain) filter(s) may not be applied (e.g., used, etc.) forthe one or more PUCCH resources. In an example, the one or more PUCCHresources in the CC may be a pre-defined PUCCH resource (e.g., from thelowest indexed PUCCH resource) in the CC, which may be used for aspecial purpose, e.g., as a secured fallback (or default) PUCCHresource, e.g., when an ambiguity situation (e.g., due to are-configuration of a control signaling, etc.) arises between a wirelessdevice (e.g., the first wireless device, or the second wireless device,etc.) and the base station. In an example, the common uplink Tx spatial(domain) filter(s) may be applied to one or more SRS resources in SRSresource set(s), where an SRS resource set of the SRS resource set(s)may be configured for antenna switching, codebook-based uplink, ornon-codebook-based uplink, etc. In an example, the common uplink Txspatial (domain) filter(s) may be applied to at least one SRS resourcein an SRS resource set configured for beam management (via a parameter,e.g., usage, set to ‘bearnManagement’, etc.), in response to receivingan explicit signaling from the base station for enabling the applyingthe common uplink Tx spatial (domain) filter(s) to the at least one SRSresource for beam management, or based on a pre-defined/pre-configuredrule, etc.

In FIG. 21, the base station transmits a first control command (e.g., aDCI) indicating one or more first TCI states. For example, the DCI mayindicate a first TCI state for downlink channels/signals of a cell, anda second TCI state for uplink channels/signals of the cell. For example,the first command or the DCI may indicate one or more TCI states fordownlink/uplink channels/signals of the cell. The one or more TCI statesmay be jointly/commonly used for downlink/uplink channels/signals of thecell. For example, the first command or the DCI may indicate a TCI statefor downlink/uplink channels/signals of the cell. The wireless devicereceives the first control command at a time T1. At a time T2, thewireless device may update one or more DL TCI states, one or more UL TCIstates or one or more joint TCI states for the cell in response toreceiving the first control command. For example, T1 and T2 may be same.For example, T2 may occur after processing delay or an offset after T1.The wireless device receives downlink channels/signals (e.g., PDCCH,PDSCH and/or CSI-RS) based on the one or more DL TCI states or the oneor more joint TCI states after updating the one or more DL states or theone or more joint TCI states. The wireless device transmits uplinkchannels/signals (e.g., PUCCH, PUSCH, and/or SRS) based on the one ormore DL TCI states or the one or more joint TCI states after updatingthe one or more UL states or the one or more joint TCI states. Thewireless device receives a second control command (e.g., a second DCI)at a time T3. The wireless device updates the one or more DL TCI states,the one or more UL TCI states or the one or more joint TCI states basedon the second control command in response to the receiving.

In the specification, a common beam update mechanism may refer a secondmode to update TCI state(s) for downlink and/or uplink channels/signalsof a cell. The downlink and/or uplink channels/signals may comprise oneor more PDCCHs scheduled via one or more coresets, one or more PDSCHs ofthe cell, or CSI-RS or one or more PUCCH resources, one or more PUSCHsof the cell, or SRS. For example, the one or more coresets may notcomprise a coreset#0 or may not comprise one or more second coresets(e.g., coreset#0, a coreset associated with a search space forSIB/RAR/paging, such as Type0/0A/2-PDCCH CSS). For example, the one ormore PUCCH resources may not comprise PUCCH resources (e.g., defaultPUCCH resources) configured/indicated by SIB message(s). For exampleCSI-RS may comprise non-zeropower CSI-RS s used for CSI feedback but maynot comprise CSI-RS s for a beam failure measurement.

The common beam update mechanism determines at least one DL TCI state(e.g., at least one DL common beam, at least one common beam) of a TRP(e.g., a coreset pool) of a serving cell, where the wireless device mayreceive downlink signals/channels (e.g., PDCCH, PDSCH and/or CSI-RS)based on the at least one DCI TCI state from the TRP of the servingcell. The at least one DL TCI state may apply to a plurality of channelsbased on the common beam update mechanism. Similarly, the common beamupdate mechanism determines at least one UL TCI state (e.g., at leastone UL common beam, at least one common beam) of a TRP (e.g., a coresetpool, a panel associated with the TRP, a panel associated with thecoreset pool) of a serving cell. An example of the common beam update isshown in FIG. 21. The at least one DL TCI of the TRP of the serving cellmay be called as a DL TCI state (a common DL beam, a DL common beam, acommon DL TCI state) of the TRP (or a coreset pool) of the serving cell.The at least one UL TCI of the TRP (or the panel) of the serving cellmay be called as an UL TCI state (a UL common beam, a UL common beam, acommon UL TCI state) of the TRP (or a coreset pool) of the serving cell.

In an example, a DL TCI state (a DL common beam, a selected DL TCIstate, a DL common TCI state) may comprise a reference signal providinga qcl-TypeD properties for receiving downlink control/datachannels/signals. The wireless device may apply/use the qcl-TypeDproperties of the reference signal that has QCL-ed with a DM-RS or aCSI-RS of a downlink control/data channel/signal. In an example, a DLTCI state may comprise a plurality of reference signals. For example,the plurality of reference signals may comprise a first reference signalfor a first TRP, a second reference signal for a second TRP. Theplurality of reference signals may be used for a repetition of a controlchannel or for a repetition of a data channel. For example, a data,based on the DL TCI state, may be transmitted via a TRP switching wherea first transmission/repetition of the data may be transmitted via thefirst TRP based on the first reference signal, and a secondtransmission/repetition of the data may be transmitted via the secondTRP based on the second reference signal. In the specifications, the DLTCI state may refer the one or more TCI states, or the one or morereference signals used for receiving a single DCI via a PDCCH or aplurality of PDCCHs. In the specifications, the DL TCI state may referthe one or more TCI states, or the one or more reference signals usedfor receiving a transport block via a PDSCH or a plurality of PDSCHs ora PDSCH with a multiple layers, In the specifications, the DL TCI statemay refer the one or more TCI states, or the one or more referencesignals used for receiving a CSI-RS or a plurality of CSI-RS s,

In an example, a UL TCI state (e.g., an UL common beam, an selected ULTCI state, an UL common TCI state) may comprise a plurality of referencesignals. For example, the plurality of reference signals may comprise afirst reference signal for a first panel (or a first TRP), a secondreference signal for a second panel (or a second TRP). The plurality ofreference signals may be used for a repetition of a control channel orfor a repetition of a data channel. For example, a data, based on the ULTCI state, may be transmitted via a panel/TRP switching where a firsttransmission/repetition of the data may be transmitted via the firstpanel/TRP based on the first reference signal, and a secondtransmission/repetition of the data may be transmitted via the secondpanel/TRP based on the second reference signal. In the specifications,the UL TCI state may refer the one or more TCI states, or the one ormore reference signals used for transmitting a single UCI via a PUCCH ora plurality of PUCCHs or a single PUSCH or a plurality of PUSCHs. In thespecifications, the UL TCI state may refer the one or more TCI states,or the one or more reference signals used for transmitting a transportblock via a PUSCH or a plurality of PUSCHs or a PUSCH with a multiplelayers, In the specifications, the UL TCI state may refer the one ormore TCI states, or the one or more reference signals used for receivinga SRS or a plurality of SRSs,

A common beam update mechanism is further categorized as separate commonbeam update mechanism (or independent common beam update mechanism,separate/independent common beam update mechanism, independent/separatecommon beam update mechanism beamUpdate-Type2-separate, separate-Type2beam update, separate Type-2 beam update mechanism) and joint (orunified common beam update mechanism, joint/ unified common beam updatemechanism, unified/joint common beam update mechanismbeamUpdate-Type2-joint, joint-Type2 beam update, joint Type-2 beamupdate mechanism)) common beam update mechanism. For example, in theseparate common beam update mechanism (e.g., separate Type 2 beam updatemechanism), the base station may indicate/configure, via RRC signaling,one or more first (or separate) TCI states for DL (e.g., one or more DLcommon beams, one or more separate DL TCI states, one or more separateDL common beams, a first TCI state pool, a first set of TCI states) andone or more second TCI states for UL (e.g., one or more UL common beams,one or more separate UL TCI states, one or more separate UL commonbeams, a second TCI state pool, a second set of TCI states)independently/separately in the separate common beam update mechanism.For example, the first TCI state pool may be configured for DL and thesecond TCP state pool may be independently configured for the UL. Forexample, a first MAC CE may indicate an activation of one or more firstTCI states for DL. A second MAC CE may indicate an activation of one ormore second TCI states for UL. The first MAC CE and the second MAC CEmay be a single MC CE or separate MAC CEs. For example, a first DCI mayindicate a DL TCI state of the one or more first TCI states, wherein theDL TCI is a common beam for DL. For example, a second DCI may indicate aUL TCI state of the one or more second TCI states, wherein the UL TCI isa common beam for UL.

In the joint common beam update, the base station and the wirelessdevice may determine one or more joint TCI states (e.g., one or morejoint DL/UL common beams, one or more joint DL/UL TCI states, one ormore DL/UL beams, one or more DL/UL TCI states) for DL and UL.

For example, in the joint common beam update mechanism (e.g., joint Type2 beam update mechanism), the base station may indicate/configure, viaRRC signaling, one or more TCI states (e.g., one or more common beams,one or more common beams, a TCI state pool, a set of TCI states) for DLand UL jointly/commonly. For example, a TCI state pool may be sharedbetween DL and UL. For example, a MAC CE may indicate an activation ofone or more joint TCI states for DL and UL. For example, a DCI mayindicate a joint DL/UL TCI state of the one or more joint TCI states,wherein the joint DL/UL TCI state is applied/indicated for the DL andUL. In the joint common beam update, the base station and the wirelessdevice may determine one or more joint TCI states (e.g., one or morejoint DL/UL common beams, one or more joint DL/UL TCI states, one ormore DL/UL beams, one or more DL/UL TCI states) for DL and UL.

A first mode (e.g., separate, separate/independent,independent/separate) beam update mechanism may refer to an independentmode to update TCI state for a downlink channel or an uplink channel.Separately indication for each downlink channel and/or uplink channelmay be used.

In an example, a base station may transmit one or more RRC messagesindicating whether the first mode is applied or the second mode isapplied for a beam update (e.g., indication of a separate beam updatemechanism or a common beam update mechanism). When the second mode isindicated, the one or mor RRC messages may further indicate whether touse a joint common beam update between downlink and uplink or a separatecommon beam update mechanism for DL and UL separately. In an example,the one or more RRC messages may comprise a parameter to indicatebetween the joint common beam update mechanism or the separate commonbeam update mechanism. In an example, a wireless device may determinethe joint common beam update mechanism in response to a first set of TCIstates (or one or more first TCI states, a first TCI state pool)configured/indicated for downlink (e.g., associated with one or moredownlink configuration parameters) being same to a second set of TCIstates (or one or more second TCI states, a second TCI state pool) or inresponse to a single set of TCI states (or a TCI state pool) beingconfigured for DL/UL. In the example, the wireless device may determinethe separate common beam update mechanism in response to the first setof TCI states (or one or more first TCI states, the first TCI statepool) configured/indicated for downlink (e.g., associated with one ormore downlink configuration parameters) being same to the second set ofTCI states (or one or more second TCI states, the second TCI state pool)or in response to independent TCI state pools being configured for DLand UL respectively.

The common beam mechanism, in the specification, may be applied for acoreset pool of a serving cell, or a serving cell, or a coreset pool ofa plurality of serving cells (if configured with simultaneous beamupdate list(s)), and/or a plurality of serving cells (if configured withsimultaneous beam update list(s)).

Exposure limits may be imposed, for example by regulation, to limitradio frequency (RF) radiation from a wireless device. In an example, anSAR limit may be imposed for the wireless device in a sub-6 GHz carrier.The transmission in a sub-6 GHz carrier system may be close to isotropicand may have a low path loss. The SAR regulatory metric for exposure maybe a volume metric (e.g., expressed as a power per unit volume). Amaximum permissible exposure (MPE) limit may be imposed for the wirelessdevice at frequency above 6 GHz. The MPE limit may be a regulatorymetric for exposure based on area, for example, a limit defined as anumber of power averaged over a defined area and time averaged over afrequency dependent time window in order to prevent a human exposurehazard represented by a tissue temperature change. The higherfrequencies above 6 GHz may interact with a person's skin surface whilethe lower frequencies below 6 GHz may be absorbed in volume. An exposurelimitation may be indicated for whole body exposure and/or for localizedexposure of human body. Exposure limits of MPE may be based on anaverage amount of exposure for a defined time window. In an example,static power limits for transmission from the wireless device may ensurethat MPE limits are met. However, such static power limits may requiresubstantial back-off in power at the wireless device and may lead to apoor uplink coverage range of the wireless device. A static power backoff rule may be based on a distance at which a detector measures an MPEviolation. In order to conform with exposure limits while providing aneffective coverage range, the wireless device may perform exposuremeasurements to detect actual exposure conditions. When the wirelessdevice determines a problematic exposure condition, the wireless devicemay reduce transmission power and/or switch panels (or antenna arrays)in response to detecting an exposure condition violating the MPE limits.

In an example, when receiving a DCI indicating an uplink grant, thewireless device may determine a panel of the wireless device and atransmission beam (or spatial domain transmission filter) on the panel.The panel may be explicitly indicated by a panel ID comprised in theDCI. The panel may be implicitly indicated by an SRS ID (or an SRSgroup/pool index), a UL TCI pool index of a UL TCI for uplinktransmission, and/or a CORESET pool index of a CORESET for receiving theDCI. In an example, when operating on high frequency (e.g., above 6GHz), the wireless device may use one of multiple panels of the wirelessdevice to communicate with the base station. The wireless device maycomply with applicable radio frequency (RF) exposure requirements. TheRF exposure requirements may comprise one or more MPE parametersassociated with a frequency range. In an example, the one or more MPEparameters associated with a frequency range may comprise a maximum (orallowed) electric field strength value (E) in unit of V/m, a maximum (orallowed) magnetic field strength value (H) in unit of A/m, a maximum (orallowed) power density value (S) in unit of mW/cm², and/or an averagingtime value in unit of minutes. In a frequency of FR2, RF exposurerequirement is defined as an allowed power density averaged over68/f^(1.05)minutes where f is a value of carrier frequency in unit ofGHz. In an example, the averaging period is about 2 minutes for 28 GHz,and 1.45 minutes in 39 GHz.

In an example, a wireless device may sense that there is a human body(or soft objects) in a proximity of a first panel (e.g., panel 1) of thewireless device, and the human body is not in the proximity of a secondpanel (e.g., panel 2) of the wireless device. The wireless device maysense the proximity of human body by using variety of sensors installedin the wireless device. The wireless device may sense the proximity ofhuman body based on indication of another wireless device or a basestation. The wireless device (e.g., by complying with the RF exposurerequirements based on the one or more MPE parameters on the operatingfrequency) may automatically reduce maximum transmission power via thefirst panel (e.g., Panel 1). Reducing maximum transmission power mayresult in uplink coverage loss, for example, when the wireless device isin an edge of coverage of the base station. In an example, instead ofreducing maximum transmission power via the first panel for complyingwith the RF exposure requirement, the wireless device may use a secondpanel (e.g., panel 2) of the wireless device to transmit uplinksignals/channels to the base station, for example, when the second panelis not in the proximity of the human body. Transmission via the secondpanel may relax a transmission power limitation for compliance of RFexposure requirement, for example, without reducing the maximumtransmission power of the wireless device.

In an example, the wireless device, by complying with RF exposurerequirements in case of proximity detection, may automatically reducemaximum output power for transmitting signals or channels to the basestation. Amount of maximum output power reduction, due to complying withthe RF exposure requirements, may be referred to as power managementmaximum power reduction (P-MPR). In an example, the wireless device mayapply P-MPR_(f,c) for carrier f of serving cell c for the casesdescribed below: a) ensuring compliance with applicable electromagneticpower density exposure requirements and addressing unwantedemissions/self-defense requirements in case of simultaneoustransmissions on multiple RAT(s) for scenarios not in scope of 3GPP RANspecifications; b) ensuring compliance with applicable electromagneticpower density exposure requirements in case of proximity detection isused to address such requirements that require a lower maximum outputpower. For wireless device conformance testing, the P-MPR_(f,c) may be 0dB. In an example, a wireless device may reduce maximum output power dueto modulation orders, transmit bandwidth configuration, waveform typeand narrow allocations. Amount of maximum output power reduction, due toimplementing modulation orders, bandwidth, waveform type, and/or thelike, may be referred to as maximum power reduction (MPR). In anexample, the cause of MPR may be different from the cause of P-MPR.

In an example, the wireless device may be indicated by the base station(via RRC signaling, MAC CE, and/or DCI) with additional emissionrequirements. Each additional emission requirement may be associatedwith a unique network signaling (NS) value indicated in RRC signaling byan NR frequency band number of the applicable operating band and anassociated value in the field additionalSpectrumEmission. The wirelessdevice, to meet the additional emission requirements, may be allowed foradditional power reduction, which may be referred to as additionalmaximum power reduction (A-MPR). In an example, a wireless device mayconfigure its maximum output power (P_(CMAX,f,c)) for carrier f of aserving cell c based on a P-MPR, a MPR, a A-MPR, a power value of apower class of the wireless device, and/or a maximum Effective IsotropicRadiated Power (EIRP_(max)) of the wireless device. P_(CMAX,f,c) may bedefined as that available to the reference point of a given transmitterbranch that corresponds to a reference point of a higher-layer filteredRSRP measurement. The wireless device may set P_(CMAX,f,c) for carrier fof a serving cell c such that corresponding measured peak EIRPP_(UMAX,f,c) is within the following boundsP_(Powerclass)−MAX(MAX(MPR_(f,c), A-MPR_(f,c))+ΔMB_(P,n),P-MPR_(f,c))−MAX{T(MAX(MPR_(f,c), A-MPR_(f,c))),T(PMPR_(f,c))}≤P_(UMAX,fc)≤EIRP_(max), while the corresponding measuredtotal radiated power P_(TMAX,f,c) is bounded by P_(TMAX,f,c)≤TRP_(max).In an example, P_(Powerclass) may be a power value corresponding to apower class of the wireless device, EIRP_(max) may be applicable maximumEIRP, MPR_(f,c) may be MPR applicable for modulation orders, bandwidth,waveform types, and/or the like, related to frequency f on cell c,A-MPR_(f,c) may be additional maximum power reduction indicated by thebase station, ΔMB_(P,n) may be a peak EIRP relaxation and TRP_(max) maybe maximum total radiated power for the power class of the wirelessdevice.

In an example, in additional to power reduction mechanism (e.g., MPR,A-MPR and/or P-MPR), the wireless device may transmit one or more RRCmessages indicating a UE capability parameter (e.g.,maxUplinkDutyCycle-FR2) to facilitate electromagnetic power densityexposure requirements. If a field of wireless device capabilitymaxUplinkDutyCycle-FR2 is present and the percentage of uplink symbolstransmitted within any 1 second evaluation period is larger thanmaxUplinkDutyCycle-FR2, the wireless device follows the uplinkscheduling and may apply P-MPR_(f,c). If the field of wireless devicecapability maxUplinkDutyCycle-FR2 is absent, the compliance toelectromagnetic power density exposure requirements may be ensured bymeans of scaling down the power density or by other means. In anexample, P-MPR may be greater than MPR or A-MPR in high frequency.Reducing maximum output power by P-MPR to comply with RF exposurerequirements may decrease uplink coverage, although downlink coverage isnot impacted by reducing maximum output power for uplink transmission.Mismatch of downlink coverage and uplink coverage, due to complying withMPE requirement, may occur.

In an example, a base station and a wireless device may determine a DLTCI state for downlink of a coreset pool of a cell and a UL TCI statefor uplink of the coreset pool of the cell based on an independentcommon beam update mechanism. For example, the base station may enablethe independent common beam update mechanism when the wireless devicemay experience MPE issue. The base station may determine the UL TCIstate based on feedback (e.g., P-MPR_(f,)) by the wireless device toaddress MPE issue.

In an example, the wireless device may be equipped with multiple panelscomprising a first panel (e.g., Panel 1) and a second panel (e.g., Panel2). The first panel and the second panel are both activated. Thewireless device may transmit uplink signals via the first panel during atime period when the first panel is activated. The wireless device maytransmit uplink signals via the second panel during a time period whenthe second panel is activated. The wireless device may detect an MPEinstance based on measurements of the first panel and the second panel.In an example, an uplink duty cycle of a cell may be defined aspercentage of uplink symbols transmitted via the cell within anevaluation period (e.g., a millisecond, or a second). When the wirelessdevice switches an uplink transmission between the first panel and thesecond panel, uplink duty cycle may be evaluated per panel. A firstuplink duty cycle of the first panel may be defined as percentage ofuplink symbols transmitted via the first panel within an evaluationperiod. A second uplink duty cycle of the second panel may be defined aspercentage of uplink symbols transmitted via the second panel within theevaluation period.

In an example, a wireless device may determine whether to apply a P-MPRvalue based on a joint evaluation of a first uplink duty cycle of thefirst panel and a second uplink duty cycle of the second panel. Thefirst uplink duty cycle and the second uplink duty cycle may beevaluated in a same evaluation period. The wireless device may determineto apply the P-MPR value based on a summation of the first uplink dutycycle and the second uplink duty cycle being greater than a threshold(e.g., maxUplinkDutyCycle-PC2-FR1, maxUplinkDutyCycle-FR2, and thelike). The wireless device may determine to apply the P-MPR value basedon one of the first uplink duty cycle and the second uplink duty cyclebeing greater than the threshold. The one may be a smaller one or abigger one of the first uplink duty cycle and the second uplink dutycycle by configuration, or predefined. In an example, the wirelessdevice may detect the MPE instance in response to the first uplink dutycycle evaluated on the first panel (within an evaluation period) beinghigher than a threshold and/or the second uplink duty cycle evaluated onthe second panel (within the evaluation period) being less than thethreshold. The threshold may be a parameter determined based on thewireless device's capability.

In an example, the wireless device may transmit to the base station oneor more UE capability RRC messages (e.g., UECapabilityInformation IE)comprising the threshold. The wireless device may transmit thecapability RRC messages in response to receiving from the base stationRRC messages for capability enquiry (e.g., UECapabilityEnquiry IE). Thethreshold may be indicated by maxUplinkDutyCycle inUECapabilityInformation. In an example, maxUplinkDutyCycle may indicatea maximum percentage of symbols during an evaluation period (e.g., 1 s)that can be scheduled for uplink transmission so as to ensure compliancewith applicable electromagnetic power density exposure requirementsprovided by regulatory bodies. In an example, when the first uplink dutycycle of the first panel is greater than the threshold, the wirelessdevice may determine it's possible that an uplink coverage loss mayoccur on the first panel due to application of P-MPR on the first panel(e.g., in case of proximity detection near (or in the direction of) thefirst panel). In an example, when the second uplink duty cycle of thesecond panel is less than the threshold, the wireless device maydetermine it's less possible that an uplink coverage loss may occur onthe second panel than on the first panel. In an example, the wirelessdevice may detect (or declare) a MPE instance in response to the firstuplink duty cycle evaluated on the first panel being higher than thethreshold and/or the second uplink duty cycle evaluated on the secondpanel (within the evaluation period) being less than the threshold.

The wireless device may detect an MPE instance based on a first P-MPR ofthe first panel and a second P-MPR of the second panel. The wirelessdevice may determine P-MPR based on at least one of two requirements:ensuring compliance with applicable electromagnetic power densityexposure requirements and addressing unwanted emissions/self-defenserequirements in case of simultaneous transmissions on multiple RAT(s)for scenarios not in scope of 3GPP RAN specifications, and ensuringcompliance with applicable electromagnetic power density exposurerequirements in case of proximity detection is used to address suchrequirements that require a lower maximum output power. In an example,the wireless device my determine a first value of a first P-MPR of thefirst panel based on the two requirements applying on the first panelwhen the wireless device determines transmission via the first panel.The wireless device may determine a second value of a second P-MPR ofthe second panel based on the two requirements applying on the secondpanel when the wireless device determines transmission via the secondpanel. In an example, the wireless device may detect (or declare) an MPEinstance in response to the first P-MPR of the first panel being higherthan a threshold and/or the second P-MPR of the second panel being lessthan the threshold. The threshold may be a power reduction valuedetermined based on a wireless device capability.

In an example, a wireless device may transmit to the base station one ormore wireless device capability RRC messages (e.g.,UECapabilityInformation IE) comprising the threshold. The wirelessdevice may transmit the capability RRC messages in response to receivingfrom the base station RRC messages for capability enquiry (e.g.,UECapabilityEnquiry IE). The threshold may indicate a P-MPR value. Whenthe applied P-MPR value is greater than the threshold, the wirelessdevice may determine it is possible that an uplink coverage loss mayoccur on the panel (e.g., due to compliance with MPE requirements incase of proximity detection). When the applied P-MPR value is less thanthe threshold, the wireless device may determine it is not possible thatan uplink coverage loss may occur on the panel. In an example, when thewireless device determines that the first P-MPR of the first panel ishigher than the threshold and/or the second P-MPR of the second panel isless than the threshold, the wireless device may determine that anuplink coverage loss may occur on the first panel, and/or may not occuron the second panel. In an example, the wireless device may detect anMPE instance based on comparison between the first P-MPR of the firstpanel and the second P-MPR of the second panel. In an example, when thewireless device determines that the first P-MPR of the first panel ishigher than the second P-MPR of the second panel, the wireless devicemay determine that an uplink coverage loss may occur more likely on thefirst panel than on the second panel. In an example, when the wirelessdevice detects a number of MPE instances occurring on the first panel oron the second panel, the wireless device may trigger a transmission ofuplink coverage recovery signal or uplink beam report. In an example,when the wireless device detects a number of MPE instances occurring onthe first panel or on the second panel, the wireless device maydetermine an MPE event.

The wireless device may detect an MPE instance based on change of afirst P-MPR of the first panel and change of a second P-MPR of thesecond panel. In an example, the change of P-MPR is determined perpanel. The wireless device may determine change of a P-MPR of a panelbased on comparison between a P-MPR determined for a latest (or current)uplink transmission and a P-MPR determined for a previous uplinktransmission before the latest uplink transmission. In an example, thewireless device may detect an MPE instance in response to change of thefirst P-MPR being greater than a threshold and/or change of the secondP-MPR being less than the threshold. The threshold may be a powerreduction value determined based on a wireless device capability. Thewireless device may transmit to the base station one or more wirelessdevice capability RRC messages (e.g., UECapabilityInformation IE)comprising the threshold. The wireless device may transmit thecapability RRC messages in response to receiving from the base stationRRC messages for capability enquiry (e.g., UECapabilityEnquiry IE). Thethreshold may indicate a P-MPR change value. In an example, when theP-MPR change applied by the wireless device is greater than thethreshold, the wireless device may determine it is possible that anuplink coverage loss may occur on the panel (e.g., due to compliancewith MPE requirements in case of proximity detection). When the P-MPRchange applied by the wireless device is less than the threshold, thewireless device may determine it is not possible that an uplink coverageloss may occur on the panel (e.g., due to compliance with MPErequirements in case of proximity detection). In an example, thewireless device may detect an MPE instance based on comparison between afirst change of a first P-MPR of the first panel and a second change ofa second P-MPR of the second panel. In an example, when the wirelessdevice determines that the first change of the first P-MPR of the firstpanel is higher than the second change of the second P-MPR of the secondpanel, the wireless device may determine that an uplink coverage lossmay occur more likely on the first panel than on the second panel. In anexample, when the wireless device detects a number of MPE instancesoccurring on the first panel or on the second panel, the wireless devicemay trigger a transmission of uplink coverage recovery signal or uplinkbeam report. In an example, when the wireless device detects a number ofMPE instances occurring on the first panel or on the second panel, thewireless device may determine an MPE event.

The wireless device may detect an MPE instance based on a first P-MPRand a first RSRP of the first panel and a second P-MPR and a second RSRPof the second panel. A P-MPR may be determined based on one or more ofabove examples. RSRP may be defined as a linear average over powercontributions of resource elements of the antenna port(s) that carryreference signals (e.g., SSB and/or CSI-RSs) configured for RSRPmeasurements within measurement frequency bandwidth in configuredreference signals occasions. In an example, for frequency range 1 (FR1), reference point for the RSRP shall be the antenna connector of thewireless device. For frequency rang 2, RSRP shall be measured based oncombined signal from antenna elements corresponding to a given receiverbranch. A first RSRP of the first panel may be measured on received RSsvia the first panel. A second RSRP of the second panel may be measuredon received RSs via the second panel. The first RSRP may be same with ordifferent from the second RSRP.

In an example, the wireless device may detect an MPE instance based on acombined value of a first P-MPR and a first RSRP of the first panelbeing less than a threshold, and/or a combined value of a second P-MPRand a second RSRP of the second panel being higher than the threshold. Acombined value of a RSRP and a P-MPR may be determined as the value ofthe RSRP minus the value of the P-MPR (e.g., when the value of the P-MPRis equal to or greater than 0). The threshold may be determined based ona wireless device capability. In an example, the wireless device maytransmit to the base station one or more wireless device capability RRCmessages (e.g., UECapabilityInformation IE) comprising the threshold.The wireless device may transmit the capability RRC messages in responseto receiving from the base station RRC messages for capability enquiry(e.g., UECapabilityEnquiry IE). The threshold may indicate a combinedRSRP and P-MPR value. In an example, when a combined value of measuredRSRP value and applicated P-MPR value on a panel is less than threshold,the wireless device may determine it is possible that an uplink coverageloss may occur on the panel (e.g., due to compliance with MPErequirements in case of proximity detection). When a combined value ofmeasured RSRP value and applicated P-MPR value on a panel is greaterthan threshold, the wireless device may determine it is not possiblethat an uplink coverage loss may occur on the panel.

A random access procedure (e.g., a 4-step RACH, four-step random accessprocedure, 4-step random access procedure) may comprise four steps forpreamble transmission (Msg 1), random access response reception(RAR/Msg2), uplink data transmission with a wireless device identity(Msg3), and contention resolution (Msg4). A random access procedure maycomprise only two steps, e.g., a 2-step RACH. In a 2-step random accessprocedure, the wireless device may transmit a preamble sequence and adata signal in one transmission (MsgA; the first step). In response todetecting a MsgA, the base station may respond to the wireless devicevia a MsgB. The MsgB may comprise the detected preamble index, thewireless device identity, and a timing advance. A 2-step RACH proceduremy result in reduced delay for RACH transmission and/or reducedsignaling overhead, for both licensed and unlicensed bands.

A 2-step RA procedure may comprise an uplink (UL) transmission of a2-step MsgA. The uplink transmission that may comprise a random accesspreamble (RAP) transmission and one or more transport blockstransmission. In response to the uplink transmission (e.g., the preambleand msg A), the wireless device may transmit a downlink (DL)transmission of a random access response and/or a 2-step MsgB. Thedownlink transmission may comprise a response, e.g., random accessresponse (RAR), corresponding to the uplink transmission. The downlinktransmission may comprise contention resolution information.Additionally, the base station may transmit a fallback RAR comprising anUL grant. In response to the UL grant, the wireless device may transmita PUSCH. The base station may transmit a PDSCH for contention resolutionin response to receiving the PUSCH.

A random access procedure (e.g., 4-step or 2-step) may be acontention-based random access procedure or a contention-freerandom-access procedure. In the contention-based random accessprocedure, a wireless device may determine a preamble, which may collidewith preamble(s) from one or more other wireless devices. In response toreceiving the preamble based on the contention-based random accessprocedure, a base station may transmit a random access response withoutknowing an identify of the wireless device of the preamble. The wirelessdevice may transmit a Msg 1 (for 2-step) or a Msg 3 (for 4-step) toresolve potential collision or inform the identity of the wirelessdevice. The base station may transmit a Msg B (for 2-step) or Msg 4 (for4-step) to confirm the identify or acknowledge the identify or resolvethe collision. The base station may indicate a preamble for thecontent-free random access procedure. The base station may identify anidentify of the wireless device based on the preamble. In thecontention-free random access procedure, the wireless device may nottransmit Msg 1 or Msg 3. After receiving a RAR from the base station,the contention-free random access procedure may be completed.

In an example, a wireless device may perform measurements on signalqualities of one or more SS/PBCH blocks (SSBs) of a cell. The wirelessdevice may determine a candidate beam or may determine a SS/PBCH blockthat the wireless device may initiate an initial access to the cell. Theinitial access procedure may trigger a 4-step random access procedure(e.g., Type-1 L1 random access procedure) or a 2-step random accessprocedure (e.g., Type-2 L1 random access procedure). A base station maytransmit system information block(s) (SIB(s)) comprising configurationparameters. The configuration parameters may comprise/indicate randomaccess resources/configurations. The wireless device may determine aplurality of random access occasions based on the random accessresources/configurations, where each random access occasion maycorrespond to one or more SS/PBCH blocks. For example, SS/PBCH blockindexes may be mapped to random access occasions may be sorted first inincreasing order of preamble indexes, second in increasing order offrequency resource, third in increasing order of time resource indexes,and fourth in increasing order of indexes of preamble (PRACH) slots. Thewireless device may determine a random access occasion based on thedetermined SS/PBCH block. The base station may acquire an index of theSS/PBCH block based on the time/frequency resources (e.g., the randomaccess occasion, frequency resource) of the preamble transmitted by thewireless device. The wireless device may determine a spatial domainfilter parameter of the preamble based on the SS/PBCH block. Forexample, the spatial domain filter parameter of the preamble may be sameto a first spatial domain filter parameter that corresponds to a spatialRX parameter to receive the SS/PBCH block. The wireless device maydetermine a spatial domain filter parameter of the preamble based on UEcapability/implementation. In the 2-step random access procedure,

In an example, a wireless device may determine a second spatial domainfilter parameter of a Msg 3 of a 4-step random access procedure based ona first spatial domain filter parameter of a preamble of the 4-steprandom access procedure. The second spatial domain filter parameter maybe same or different from the first spatial domain filter parameter. Thewireless device may transmit a PUCCH corresponding to a Msg 4 of the4-step random access procedure. The wireless device may determine athird spatial domain filter parameter of the PUCCH based on the firstdomain spatial domain filter parameter or the second spatial domainfilter parameter.

In an example, a wireless device may determine a second spatial domainfilter parameter of a Msg A of a 2-step random access procedure based ona first spatial domain filter parameter of a preamble of the 2-steprandom access procedure. The second spatial domain filter parameter maybe same to the first spatial domain filter parameter. The wirelessdevice may transmit a PUCCH corresponding to a Msg B of the 2-steprandom access procedure. The wireless device may determine a thirdspatial domain filter parameter of the PUCCH based on the first domainspatial domain filter parameter or the second spatial domain filterparameter. The wireless device may determine the third spatial domainfilter parameter of the PUCCH based on a spatial domain filter parameterof a last transmitted PUSCH in a cell. The 2-step random access may beperformed in the cell.

In an example, a wireless device may be enabled/configured with a firstmode for a TCI state determination where an individual TCI state may bedynamically and/or semi-statically indicated via DCI, MAC CE and/or RRCsignaling for a downlink signal or an uplink signal. The wireless devicemay receive one or more RRC messages indicating configurationparameters. The configuration parameters may comprise/indicate a SRSresource set. The SRS resource set may comprise one or more SRSresources and a pathloss reference signal (PL-RS). The wireless devicemay determine a transmission power of a SRS based on a SRS resource ofthe one or more SRS resources based on the PL-RS configured for the SRSresource set.

In an example, the configuration parameters may comprise a first SRSresource set for a beam management and a second SRS resource set for acodebook. The first SRS resource set may comprise a first PL-RS. Thesecond SRS resource set may comprise a second PL-RS. The first PL-RS maybe one of a first SSB and a first CSI-RS. The second PL-RS may be one ofa second SSB and a second CSI-RS. The first PL-RS may be different fromthe second PL-RS. The wireless device may determine a first transmissionpower for a SRS resource of the first SRS resource set based on thefirst PL-RS. The wireless device may determine a second transmissionpower for a second SRS resource of the second SRS resource set based onthe second PL-RS.

In an example, a wireless device may be enabled/configured with a secondmode (e.g., second TCI indication mechanism, a second spatial domainfilter update mechanism, a second type, a common beam update,beamUpadate-Type2) to update and/or apply a TCI state for a downlinkchannel and/or an uplink channel. In a second mode, a TCI state may beapplied to one or more downlink channels such as PDCCH and PDSCH. Asecond TCI state (e.g., an UL TCI, a common UL TCI state, a common ULTCI, a UL common TCI state, a UL common beam) may be applied to one ormore uplink channels such as PUSCH, PUCCH and SRS. The TCI state may besame as the second TCI state.

In an example, the second TCI state may be applied to transmissions, ofan uplink carrier, via PUSCH and one or more PUCCH resources of theuplink carrier and SRS transmissions via one or more SRS resources ofthe uplink carrier. For example, a SRS resource set of the one or moreSRS resources may be configured for a usage as codebook, non-codebook,or antennaswitching. For example, the wireless device may not apply thesecond TCI state for a second SRS resource set configured with a secondusage of beamManagement. For example, one or more third TCI states orone or more spatial domain filter parameters (e.g.,SRS-spatialRelationInfos) may be configured for the second SRS resourceset, where the wireless device may determine spatial domain filterparameter of a SRS resource, of the second SRS resource set, based onthe one or more third TCI states or the one or more spatial domainfilter parameters.

A wireless device may receive one or more RRC messages indicatingconfiguration parameters. The configuration parameters maycomprise/indicate a set of TCI states for an uplink carrier. The set ofTCI states may comprise one or more TCI states for the uplink carrier.For example, the configuration parameters may comprise/indicate a set ofpathloss RSs for the set of TCI states, where each of the set ofpathloss RSs may correspond to each of the set of TCI states. Forexample, a TCI state of the set of TCI states may comprise a PL-RS ofthe set of PL-RSs. For example, a TCI state of the set of TCI states maybe associated with a PL-RS of the set of PL-RSs. For example, a basestation may transmit one or more MAC CEs and/or DCIs to associate a TCIstate of the set of TCI states and a PL-RS of the set of PL-RSs.

In an example, the configuration parameters may comprise an SRS resourceset with a usage of beam management. The SRS resource set may comprise afirst SRS resource and a second SRS resource. The first SRS resource maybe associated with or configured with a first TCI state. The first TCIstate may be associated with a first PL-RS. The second SRS resource maybe associated with or configured with a second TCI state. The second TCIstate may be associated with a second PL-RS.

In existing technologies, a wireless device may transmit: a first SRStransmission via the first SRS resource, and a second SRS transmissionvia the second SRS resource. The wireless device may transmit the firstSRS transmission and the second SRS transmission based on a DCI or basedon a configuration parameter. The wireless device may determine a firsttransmission power for the first SRS transmission based on the firstPL-RS. The wireless device may determine a second transmission power forthe second SRS transmission based on the second PL-RS. The firsttransmission power and the second transmission power may be different inresponse to the first PL-RS being different from the second PL-RS.

A base station may receive the first SRS transmission based on the firstTCI state. The base station may receive the second SRS transmissionbased on the second TCI state. With different power between the firstSRS transmission and the second SRS transmission, the base station maynot be able to determine which SRS transmission may result in a betterquality. For example, the base station may not know whether the firstPL-RS shows better quality than the second PL-RS for the wirelessdevice. Without knowing differences between the first transmission powerand the second transmission power, a higher received power of either thefirst SRS transmission or the second SRS transmission may not indicatewhich SRS transmission (or which TCI state) shows better channelquality. Implementation of existing technologies may lead varioustransmission powers of SRS resources of an SRS resource set.Implementation existing technologies may lead performance degradation ofan uplink beam management procedure based on an SRS resource setconfigured for a usage of a beam management.

In an example, a wireless device may determine a single PL-RS for a SRSresource set based on one or more PL-RSs associated with one or more SRSresources of the SRS resource set in response to the SRS resource setbeing configured with or associated with a usage of a beam management.The wireless device may determine one or more PL-RSs of a second SRSresource set based on one or more second PL-RSs associated with one ormore second SRS resources of the second SRS resource set in response tothe second SRS resource set being configured with or associated with ausage other than the beam management. In another example, the wirelessdevice may determine a second PL-RS of the second SRs resource set basedon a UL TCI (or a UL TCI state, a common UL beam, a common UL TCI state,a common UL TCI) that is a common uplink beam applied for SRS resourceset(s) configured with or associated with usage other than the beammanagement and transmissions via PUSCH and/or PUCCH resources.

The wireless device may determine the single PL-RS for the SRS resourceset based on one or more rules. For example, the wireless device maydetermine a PL-RS associated with a SRS resource, of the SRS resourceset, with a lowest (or a highest) index among the one or more SRSresources of the SRS resource set. For example, the wireless device maydetermine the single PL-RS, of the one or more PL-RSs, that has a lowest(or a highest) index among the one or more PL-RSs. For example, thewireless device may determine the single PL-RS that is associated with aTCI state, of one or more TCI states, with a lowest (or a highest)index. The one or more TCI states may be associated with the one or moreSRS resources.

Example embodiments may allow determining a single PL-RS for an SRSresource set configured for a beam management. Example embodiments mayimprove an uplink beam management by maintaining consistent transmissionpower across one or more SRS transmission via one or more SRS resourcesof the SRS resource set.

In an example, a base station may transmit one or more RRC messagesindicating configuration parameters. The configuration parameters maycomprise a PL-RS for a first SRS resource set in response to a firstusage of the first SRS resource set being a beam management. A first SRSresource, of the first SRS resource set, may be associated with a firstTCI state. The first TCI state may be associated with a first PL-RS. Thewireless device may determine a transmission power of a first SRStransmission via the first SRS resource based on the PL-RS. The wirelessdevice may not use the first PL-RS associated with the first TCI state.The wireless device may transmit the first SRS transmission based on thefirst TCI state and based on the PL-RS. The wireless device may ignorethe first PL-RS associated with the first TCI state in response to thefirst SRS resource set, with the usage of the beam management,comprising the first SRS resource. The wireless device may determine asecond transmission power of a second SRS transmission based on a secondPL-RS associated with a second TCI state. For example, the second SRSresource is of an SRS resource set that is configured with a secondusage other than the beam management. The second SRS resource may beassociated with the second TCI state. The second TCI state may beassociated with the second PL-RS. The wireless device may determine thesecond transmission power based on the second PL-RS associated with thesecond TCI state that provides a spatial domain filter parameter for thesecond SRS transmission. The wireless device may determine thetransmission power based on the PL-RS that is configured for the SRSresource set regardless of the TCI state used for/configured for the SRStransmission.

Example embodiments may allow determining a single PL-RS for an SRSresource set configured for a beam management. Example embodiments mayimprove an uplink beam management by maintaining consistent transmissionpower across one or more SRS transmission via one or more SRS resourcesof the SRS resource set.

In an example, a wireless device may determine a single PL-RS of a SRSresource set of an uplink carrier of a coreset pool with a usage of abeam management based on a UL TCI of the uplink carrier of the coresetpool. For example, the UL TCI is a common uplink beam or a TCI stateapplied for uplink transmissions via PUSCH/PUCCH and SRS transmissionsfor codebook/non-codebook usages (e.g., other than beam managementusage). The UL TCI may be a currently active TCI state for the uplinkcarrier. The UL TCI may be a currently active uplink TCI state for theuplink carrier of the coreset pool. When the wireless device isassociated/configured with a first coreset pool and a second corsetpool, the wireless device may be activated with a first UL TCI for theuplink carrier of the first coreset pool and a second UL TCI for theuplink carrier of the second coreset pool.

Example embodiments may reduce a wireless device complexity for exampleby reducing a number of pathloss reference signals for an uplinkcarrier. The wireless device may need to be activated with a singlePL-RS for a coreset pool of the uplink carrier. The single PL-RS may beused for transmissions via PUSCHs, PUCCH resources and/or SRS resources.The SRS resources may be used for a beam management and other usagessuch as codebook and non-codebook.

FIG. 22 illustrates an example scenario of a transmission powerdetermination for a SRS transmission via a beam management SRS resourceas per an aspect of an example embodiment of the present disclosure. Thebase station may transmit one or more RRC messages indicatingconfiguration parameters at a first time (TO). The configurationparameters may comprise a first SRS resource set (SRS set 1). Forexample, the first SRS resource set is configured with a usage of beammanagement for a first coreset pool of an uplink carrier/cell. Theconfiguration parameters may comprise a second SRS resource set (SRS set2). For example, the second SRS resource set is configured with a usageof beam management for a second coreset pool of the uplink carrier/cell.

The configuration parameters may comprise/indicate one or more first SRSresources (e.g., SRS index i, . . . , SRS index i+o) of the first SRSresource set. The configuration parameters may comprise/indicate one ormore second SRS resources (e.g., SRS j, . . . , SRS i+p) of the secondSRS resource set. Each of the one or more first SRS resources may beassociated with or configured with a TCI state. For example, a first SRS(e.g., SRS i) of the one or more first SRS resources is configured withor associated with a TCI state with an index of k+q (e.g., TCI k+q). Forexample, a second SRS (e.g., SRS i+o) may be associated with orconfigured with a second TCI state (e.g., TCI k+q). The one or morefirst SRS resources may be associated with or configured with one ormore TCI states (e.g., TCI k, . . . , TCI k+q).

For example, an SRS resource may be associated with a TCI state via oneor more RRC, MAC-CE and/or DCI signaling. For example, the SRS resourcemay indicate the TCI state or comprise a parameter of an index of theTCI state. For example, a wireless device may receive one or more MACCEs indicating a mapping between the SRS resource and the TCI state(e.g., the one or more MAC CEs comprise an index of the SRS resource andan index of the TCI state where the SRS resource and the TCI state aremapped). For example, the wireless device may receive one or more DCIsindicating a mapping between the SRS resource and the TCI state. Forexample, a DCI indicating a UL TCI (e.g., an uplink common beam) maydetermine the mapping between a SRS resource of a SRS resource set withan usage of codebook or non-codebook and the UL TCI.

The wireless device may determine the TCI state for the SRS resourcebased on the one or more RRC, MAC-CE and/or DCI signaling.

Each TCI state of the one or more TCI states may be configured with orassociated with a PL-RS. For example, the first TCI state and the secondTCI state may be configured with or associated with a second PL-RS(e.g., PL-RS m+s). For example, a third TCI state of (e.g., TCI k) isassociated with or configured with a first PL-RS (e.g., PL-RS m).

For example, a TCI state may be associated with a PL-RS via one or moreRRC, MAC-CE and/or DCI signaling. For example, the TCI state mayindicate the PL-RS or comprise a parameter of an index of the PL-RS. Forexample, a wireless device may receive one or more MAC CEs indicating amapping between the TCI state and the PL-RS (e.g., the one or more MACCEs comprise an index of the TCI state and an index of the PL-RS wherethe TCI state and the PL-RS are mapped). For example, the wirelessdevice may receive one or more DCIs indicating a mapping between the TCIstate and the PL-RS. For example, a DCI indicating a UL TCI (e.g., anuplink common beam) may comprise a field indicating a second PL-RS. TheDCI may determine the mapping between the UL TCI and the second PL-RS.

The wireless device may determine the PL-RS for the TCI state based onthe one or more RRC, MAC-CE and/or DCI signaling.

For the second SRS resource set, a third SRS resource (e.g., SRS j) maybe configured with or associated with a third TCI state (TCI l). Afourth SRS resource (e.g., SRS j+p) may be configured with or associatedwith a fourth TCI state (TCI l+r). The third TCI state may be configuredwith or associated with a third PL-RS (PL-RS n). The fourth TCI statemay be configured with or associated with a fourth PL-RS (PL-RS n+t).

The wireless device may transmit one or more SRS transmissions (e.g.,beam management SRS transmissions, BM-SRS transmissions) via one or moreSRS resources of the second SRS resource set at a second time (T1). Forexample, the one or more SRS resources may comprise the third SRSresource (SRS j) and the fourth SRS resource (SRS j+p). The wirelessdevice may determine a first transmission power for a first SRStransmission via the third SRS resource and based on the third PL-RS.The wireless device may determine a second transmission power for asecond SRS transmission via the fourth SRS resource and based on thefourth PL-RS. For example, the third PL-RS and the fourth PL-RS may bedifferent. Based on the third PL-RS being different from the fourthPL-RS, the first transmission power may be different from the secondtransmission power. In determining a candidate beam based on the one ormore SRS transmissions via the second SRS resource set, the base stationmay expect a same/single transmission power being determined for the oneor more SRS transmissions.

For example, the wireless device may determine the same/singletransmission power based on the first SRS transmission. For example, thewireless device may determine the same/single transmission power basedon the third SRS resource. For example, the wireless device maydetermine the same/single transmission power based on the third PL-RS.For example, the wireless device may determine the same/singletransmission power based on the third TCI state. For example, thewireless device may determine the same/single transmission power basedon the third PL-RS. For example, the base station may indicate a PL-RSfor the second SRS resource set via RRC, MAC-CE and/or DCI signaling.For example, the base station may configure, via RRC, MAC CE and/or DCIsignaling, a single PL-RS for an SRS resource set configured with ausage of beam management.

A SRS resource may be associated with a PL-RS in response to the SRSresource being associated/configured with a TCI state that isassociated/configured with the PL-RS.

In an example, a base station may transmit one or more RRC messagesindicating configuration parameters. The configuration parameters mayindicate/comprise parameters for an SRS resource set. The parameters maycomprise an index of the SRS resource set, a list of SRS resources, anda usage. For example, a value of the usage may indicate a purpose of theSRS resource set from a codebook, a non-codebook (nonCodebook), a beammanagement (beamManagement), or an antenna switching (antennaSwitching).The parameters may additionally comprise a pathloss reference signal(e.g., pathlossReferenceRS) or a list of pathloss reference signals(e.g., pathlossReferenceRSList) in response to the usage of the SRSresource set being the beam management (e.g., the usage=beamManagement).

A parameter of the pathloss reference signal or the list of pathlossreference signals may be optionally present in the one or more RRCmessages for a SRS resource set conditioned to a usage of the SRSresource set being indicated/configured with a beam management(beamManagement). The wireless device may not expect to receive theparameter of the pathloss reference signal or the list of pathlossreference signals for a second SRSR resource set configured with a usageother than the beam management. The wireless device may not expect toreceive the parameter of the pathloss reference signal or the list ofpathloss reference signals for a second SRS resource set in response tothe second SRS resource set being configured with a usage other than thebeam management and the wireless device being enabled/configured withthe second mode to update and/or apply a TCI state for downlink of acell or uplink of the cell. The second mode may be called as a secondTCI indication mechanism, a second spatial domain filter updatemechanism, a second type, a common beam update, or a beamUpadate-Type2.

FIG. 23A and 23B illustrate configuration parameters for an SRS resourceset as per an aspect of an example embodiment of the present disclosure.FIG. 23A illustrates that the configuration parameters may comprise anindex of the SRS resource (srs-ResourceSetId), a list of indexes for alist of SRS resources (srs-ResourceIdList), and a usage. Theconfiguration parameters may additionally comprise a pathloss referencesignal (pathlossReferenceRS) or a list of pathloss reference signals(pathlossReferenceRSList) when the usage of the SRS resource set is abeam management (beamManagement).

Thus, the pathloss reference signal or the list of pathloss referencesignals may be optionally present/configured conditioned to the usagebeing beam management. For example, FIG. 23B illustrates an exampledescription of Cond beamManagement for the pathloss reference signal orthe list of pathloss reference signals. For example, the pathlossreference signal or the list of pathloss reference signals may beoptionally present when a usage of the SRS resource set is beammanagement. Otherwise, the field may be absent.

The wireless device may be configured with an SRS-ResourceSet-R17 inresponse to the wireless device being enabled or configured with thesecond TCI indication mechanism. The wireless device may be configuredwith an SRS-ResourceSet-R16 or an SRS-ResourceSet in response to thewireless device being enabled or configured with the first TCIindication mechanism.

For example, the wireless device may be configured with one or more SRSresources of the SRS resource set configured with the usage of the beammanagement. The one or more SRS resources may be configured with orassociated with one or more TCI states. The one or more TCI states maybe configured with or associated with one or more PL-RSs. For example,the SRS resource set may be the first SRS resource set shown in FIG. 22.For example, the SRS resource set may be the second SRS resource setshown in FIG. 22. The wireless device may ignore the one or more PL-RSsassociated with the one or more TCI states for a transmission powerdetermination of beam management SRS transmissions (e.g., BM-SRStransmissions) via the SRS resource set. For example, the wirelessdevice may ignore PL-RS n, . . . PL-RS n_t in FIG. 22 in determiningtransmission powers for the BM-SRS transmissions at the second time. Thewireless device may determine the transmission powers for the BM-RStransmissions based on the pathlossReferenceRS of the SRS resource setor the pathlossReferenceRSList of the SRS resource set.

Embodiments may determine a single pathloss reference signal for an SRSresource set regardless of TCI states associated with SRS resource(s) ofthe SRS resource set. The SRS resource set may be configured with ausage of a beam management. The wireless device may determine a singletransmission power for a plurality of BM-SRS transmissions based on theSRS resource set.

In an example, a base station may transmit one or more RRC messagescomprising/indicating configuration parameters for an SRS resource set.The configuration parameters may indicate a list of indexes for a listof SRS resources. Parameters (e.g., SRS-Resource-R17), of a SRS resourceof the list of SRS resources, may comprise an index of the SRS resource(e.g., srs-ResourceId). For example, FIG. 24A and 24B illustratesparameters for an SRS resource as per an aspect of an example embodimentof the present disclosure. For example, FIG. 24A shows an example forparameters of an SRS resource. The parameters may comprise/indicate anindex of an SRS resource (e.g., SRS-ResourceId). The parameters maycomprise a spatial relation info in response to a usage of the SRSresource set for the SRS resource being set to a beam management. Thespatial relation info may comprise a n index of a reference signal. Forexample, the reference signal may be a SSB or a CSI-RS or an SRS. Theparameters may comprise a TCI state in response to the usage of the SRSresource set for the SRS resource being set to non-beam management(e.g., codebook, nonCodebook, antennaSwitching). The TCI state maycomprise one or more reference signals. The TCI state may comprise ormay be associated with a pathloss reference signal.

FIG. 24B shows an example description for a condition of beam management(e.g., Cond baemManagement) and an example description for a conditionof non beam management (e.g., Cond non-beamManagement). The wirelessdevice may expect to be optionally configured with (e.g., the parametersmay comprise) the spatialRelationInfo conditioned to the beam managementbeing associated with the SRS resource set. The field of thespatialRelationInfo or the parameter may be optionally present when theusage of the SRS resource set is configured with the beam management.Otherwise, the field may not be present or may be absent.

For the condition of non-beam management, the wireless device may expectto be configured with (e.g., the parameters may comprise) the tciStateconditioned to the non beam management being associated with the SRSresource set (e.g., the usage may be a codebook, a non-codebook or anantenna switching). The field of the tciState or the parameter may beoptionally present in response to the usage of the SRS resource setbeing a codebook, a nonCodebook or an antennaSwitching (e.g., non-beammanagement). Otherwise, the field may not be present or may be absent.

The wireless device may be configured with configuration parametersbased on the SRS-Resource-R17 (e.g., shown FIG. 24A/24B) based on thewireless device being enabled or configured with the second TCIindication mechanism.

For example, a wireless device may be configured with an SRS resourceconfiguration that may comprise an index of the SRS resource and aspatialRelationInfo for a reference signal regardless of whether the SRSresource is for a SRS resource set with a usage of a beam management ora codebook/nonCodebook/antennaSwitching, in response to the wirelessdevice being enabled or configured with the first indication mechanism.The SRS resource configuration may not comprise a tciState.

For example, a wireless device may be configured with an SRS resourceconfiguration that may comprise an index of the SRS resource and atciState for a reference signal regardless of whether the SRS resourceis for a SRS resource set with a usage of a beam management or acodebook/nonCodebook/antennaSwitching, in response to the wirelessdevice being enabled or configured with the second indication mechanism.The SRS resource configuration may not comprise a spatialRelationInfo.

Embodiments may determine a single pathloss reference signal for an SRSresource set regardless of TCI states associated with SRS resource(s) ofthe SRS resource set. The SRS resource set may be configured with ausage of a beam management. The wireless device may determine a singletransmission power for a plurality of BM-SRS transmissions based on theSRS resource set.

In an example, a wireless device may receive one or more RRC messages.The one or more RRC messages may comprise configuration parameters. Theconfiguration parameters may comprise/indicate parameters of an SRSresource set. The parameters of the SRS resource may comprise an indexof the SRS resource set, a list of indexes for a list of SRS resources,and a usage. Second parameters of an SRS resource for the list of SRSresources may comprise an index of the SRS resource and a tciStateindicating a TCI state associated or configured for the SRS resource.For example, the tciState may be an index of the TCI state associatedwith the SRS resource. For example, the tciState may be the TCI statethat is configured for the SRS resource.

In an example, the wireless device may receive one or more second RRCmessages. The one or more second RRC messages may comprise secondconfiguration parameters. The second configuration parameters maycomprise/indicate a set of TCI states for an uplink carrier/cell. forexample, the uplink carrier/cell may be for the SRS resource set. Afirst TCI state of the set of TCI states may be used for a common uplinkbeam of the uplink carrier/cell. For example, when the wireless devicemay be associated with a plurality of coreset pools or a plurality ofpanels, the wireless device may be configured with a second set of TCIstates for the uplink carrier/cell. For example, the set of TCI statesmay be applied for a first coreset pool of the plurality of coresetpools or a first panel of the plurality of panels. For example, thesecond set of TCI states may be applied for a second coreset pool of theplurality of coreset pools or a second panel of the plurality of panels.

The wireless device may determine the first TCI state of the set of TCIstates where an index of the first TCI state is a lowest (or a highest)among TCI state(s) of the set of TCI states. For example, the first TCIstate is a UL TCI (e.g., an uplink common beam, an uplink TCI state) ofthe uplink carrier/cell.

The wireless device may receive one or more third RRC messages. The oneor more third RRC messages may comprise third configuration parameters.The third configuration parameters may comprise/indicate a set ofPL-RSs. The third configuration parameters may comprise/indicate amapping/association between the set of TCI states and the set of PL-RSs.For example, a TCI state of the set of TCI states may be configured witha PL-RS. For example, a TCI state of the set of TCI states may beconfigured with an index of a PL-RS of the set of PL-RSs.

FIG. 25 illustrates an example scenario for determining a pathlossreference signal for an SRS resource set. FIG. 25 shows a similarscenario to FIG. 23 except that the wireless device may transmit one ormore second SRS transmissions based on the first SRS set in a third time(T2) in addition to one or more first SRS transmissions based on thesecond SRS set in a second time (T1). The wireless device may receiveone or more RRC messages indicating configuration parameters. Theconfiguration parameters may indicate one or more SRS resource sets.Each SRS resource set may comprise one or more SRS resources. Each SRSresource may be associated with or be configured with a TCI state. TheTCI state may be associated with or be configured with a PL-RS.

In an example, the configuration parameters may comprise a first set ofTCI states for a first coreset pool of an uplink carrier/cell or a firstpanel of the uplink carrier/cell. The wireless device may determine ormay receive one or more indication to determine a TCI state of the firstset of TCI states as a UL TCI of the first coreset pool or the firstpanel of the uplink carrier/cell. The UL TCI may be referred as anuplink common beam in the specification for a coreset pool of a firstuplink carrier/cell or a panel of a second uplink carrier/cell.

The wireless device may determine a spatial domain filter parameter foran uplink signal/channel, via PUSCH, PUCCH resources and SRS resourcesfor non-beamManagement (e.g., SRS resources of an SRS resource set witha usage other than the beam management), based on the UL TCI. Forexample, the wireless device may transmit the uplink signal/channel viathe first coreset pool of the uplink carrier/cell or via the first panelof the uplink carrier/cell.

The configuration parameters may comprise parameters of a first SRSresource set (e.g., SRS Set1) with a usage of a beam management. Theconfiguration parameters may comprise second parameters of a second SRSresource set (e.g., SRS Set2) with a usage of a beam management. Forexample, the first SRS resource set is for the first coreset pool of theuplink carrier/cell or the first panel of the uplink carrier/cell. Thesecond SRS resource set may be for a second coreset pool of the uplinkcarrier/cell or a second panel of the uplink carrier/cell.

In an example, the configuration parameters may comprise a third set ofTCI states for the first coreset pool of the uplink carrier/cell or thefirst panel of the uplink carrier/cell. In an example, the wirelessdevice may use the first set of TCI states for the UL TCI determination.The wireless device may determine a transmission power of an uplinksignal based on the UL TCI and based on a PL-RS associated with the ULTCI. For example, the PL-RS is configured for a TCI state, of the firstset of TCI states, corresponding to the UL TCI. For example, an index ofthe PL-RS is configured for the TCI state.

The wireless device may determine a second TCI state of the third set ofTCI states for an SRS transmission via an SRS resource of the first SRSresource set or the second SRS resource set. For example, the wirelessdevice may determine a second transmission power of the SRS transmissionbased on a second TCI state associated with or configured with thesecond TCI state. The wireless device may determine the second TCI stateor may receive one or more indications to determine the second TCIstate, where the second TCI belongs to the third set of TCI states.

A common beam update mechanism (e.g., the second TCI indicationmechanism) is further categorized as separate common beam updatemechanism (or independent common beam update mechanism,separate/independent common beam update mechanism, independent/separatecommon beam update mechanism beamUpdate-Type2-separate, separate-Type2beam update, separate Type-2 beam update mechanism) and joint (orunified common beam update mechanism, joint/ unified common beam updatemechanism, unified/joint common beam update mechanismbeamUpdate-Type2-joint, joint-Type2 beam update, joint Type-2 beamupdate mechanism)) common beam update mechanism.

In an example, the wireless device may be configured with (e.g., theconfiguration parameters may comprise/indicate) the first set of TCIstates for the first coreset pool of the uplink carrier/cell or thefirst panel of the uplink carrier/cell. The wireless device may use ormay be configured to use the first set of TCI states in response to thewireless device being enabled or configured with the second TCIindication mechanism with a joint common beam update mechanism (e.g.,the UL TCI may be same as a DL TCI of a downlink carrier/cell where thedownlink carrier/cell and the uplink carrier/cell belong to a servingcell). The wireless device may be configured with (e.g., theconfiguration parameters may comprise/indicate) a fourth set of TCIstates for the first coreset pool of the uplink carrier/cell or thefirst panel of the uplink carrier/cell. The wireless device may use ormay be configured to use the fourth set of TCI states in response to thewireless device being enabled or configured with the second TCIindication mechanism with an independent common beam update mechanism(e.g., the UL TCI may be indicated/updated independent from a DL TCI ofa downlink carrier/cell where the downlink carrier/cell and the uplinkcarrier/cell belong to a serving cell).

The wireless device may be configured with a TCI state for a SRSresource of a SRS resource set with a usage of beam management based onthe first set of TCI states, or the third set of TCI states, or thefourth set of TCI states. For example, the SRS resource set is for thefirst coreset pool of the uplink carrier/cell or the first panel of theuplink carrier/cell. For example, the first set of TCI states are a TCIpool for a joint common beam update mechanism for the uplinkcarrier/cell. For example, the third set of TCI states are a second TCIpool dedicatedly configured for the SRs resource set. For example, thefourth set of TCI states are a third TCI pool for an independent commonbeam update mechanism for the uplink carrier/cell.

In determining a TCI pool for the SRS resource set, a few examples maybe considered. For example, the wireless device may determine the firstset of TCI states in response to the wireless device being configuredwith or enabled with the joint common beam update mechanism and/or thewireless device not being configured with the third set of TCI states.For example, the wireless device may determine the fourth set of TCIstates in response to the wireless device being configured with orenabled with the independent common beam update mechanism and/or thewireless device not being configured with the third set of TCI states.For example, the wireless device may determine the third set of TCIstates in response to the wireless device being configured with thethird set of TCI states.

For example, when the third set of TCI states are configuredadditionally to the first set of TCI states and/or the fourth set of TCIstates, the wireless device may receive one or more MAC CE activatingthird active TCI states of the third set of TCI states. An SRS resourceof the SRS resource set may be configured with or associated with a TCIstate of the third active TCI states. For example, one or more MAC CEsmay indicate an index of an SRS resource and one of third active TCIstates. The one or more MAC CEs may update an associated TCI state forthe SRS resource. For example, one or more second MAC CEs may indicateone of third active TCI states and an index of a PL-RS. The one or moresecond MAC CEs may update an associated PL-RS for the one of the thirdactive TCI states.

In an example, the one or more first SRS resources of the first SRSresource set may be associated with or configured with one or more TCIstates of a TCI pool or one or more activated TCI states. For example,the TCI pool may be the first set of TCI states, the third set of TCIstates or the fourth set of TCI states. The wireless device may receiveone or more MAC CEs activating the one or more activated TCI states ofthe one or more TCI states of the TCI pool.

For example, when an SRS resource of the one or more SRS resources isassociated with or configured with a TCI state of the one or more TCIstates, an index of the TCI state of the one or more TCI states may beindicated/comprised in the SRS resource configuration. For example, whenthe SRS resource is associated with or configured with a TCI state ofthe one or more activated TCI states, a codepoint, indicating anactivated TCI state of the one or more activated TCI states, may beindicated/comprised in the SRS resource configuration. For example, whena maximum number of the one or more activated TCI states are K (e.g.,K=8), a value of the code point may be in a range of [0, . . . , 7].

When a wireless device may determine a plurality of PL-RSs beingassociated with one or more TCI states for a SRS resource set, thewireless device may determine a single PL-RS of the plurality of PL-RSsbased on one or more rules. For example, a rule of the one or more rulesmay be based on a lowest (or a highest) indexed SRS resource of one ormore SRS resources of the SRS resource set.

FIG. 25 illustrates the first SRS resource set comprises a list of SRSresources from SRS with index i to index i+o (e.g., SRS I, SRS, i+1, . .. , SRS i+o). For example, the list of SRS resources may have a list ofindexes. The wireless device may determine an SRS resource, of the listof SRs resources, with a lowest (or a highest) index among the list ofSRS resources. For example, in FIG. 25, the SRS with index i may bedetermined for the first SRS resource set based on the rule. Forexample, in FIG. 25, a second SRS with index j may be determined for thesecond SRS resource set based on the rule.

The wireless device may transmit a first SRS transmission via a firstSRS resource (e.g., SRS j) of the second SRS resource set at the secondtime. The wireless device may transmit a second SRS transmission via asecond SRS resource (e.g., SRS j+p) of the second SRS resource set atthe second time. The wireless device may determine a first transmissionpower for the first SRS transmission and the second SRS transmission viathe second SRS resource set based on the first SRS resource in responseto a first index (j) of the first SRS resource being lower than a secondindex (j+p) of the second SRS resource. The wireless device maydetermine the second SRS that has a lowest (or a highest) index amongone or more second SRS resources of the second SRS resource set.

The wireless device may transmit the first SRS transmission at thesecond time (T1) based on the first transmission power and with aspatial domain filter parameter determined based on a first TCI state(e.g., TCI1) of the first SRS resource. The wireless device may transmitthe second SRS transmission at the second time based on the firsttransmission power and with a second spatial domain filter parameterdetermined based on a second TCI state (e.g., TCI l+r) of the second SRSresource.

The wireless device may determine the first transmission power based onthe first TCI state of the first SRS resource. For example, the wirelessdevice may determine the first transmission power based on a firstpathloss reference signal (e.g., PL-RS n) associated with or configuredwith the first TCI state (TCI1). For example, the wireless device maydetermine the first transmission power based on a first reference signalof the first TCI state (e.g., a reference signal of the first TCI statewith qcl-typeD. E.g., a reference signal of a qcl-Type1 withqcl-Type=typeD or a reference signal of a qcl-Type2 withqcl-Type=typed). For example, the wireless device may determine thefirst reference signal as the first PL-RS.

The wireless device may determine the first PL-RS for the firsttransmission power based on a reference signal of the first TCI state ora PL-RS configured for the first TCI state or a PL-RS associated withthe first TCI state. The first TCI state may comprise an index of thePL-RS if the PL-RS is configured for the first TCI state. The first TCIstate may be indicated, via RRC, MAC-CE, and/or DCI signaling, to beassociated with the PL-RS if the PL-RS is associated with the first TCIstate.

The wireless device may be initially configured with a second PL-RS forthe first TCI state via a RRC signaling. The wireless device may receiveone or more MAC CEs or DCIs to update an associated PL-RS to the firstTCI state from the second PL-RS to a third PL-RS. The wireless devicemay use the third PL-RS as the first PL-RS for the first transmissionpower. The wireless device may use a most recently updated/configuredpathloss reference signal associated/configured with the first TCI statefor determining the first transmission power. The wireless device mayuse the reference signal of the first TCI state in response to a PL-RSis not explicitly indicated or configured via RRC, MAC-CE, and/or DCIsignaling.

The wireless device may be scheduled to transmit a third SRStransmission via a third SRS resource (e.g., SRS i) of the first SRSresource set at a third time (T2). The wireless device may be scheduledto transmit a fourth SRS transmission via a fourth SRS resource (e.g.,SRS i+o) of the first SRs resource set at the third time. The wirelessdevice may determine a second transmission power for the third SRStransmission and the fourth SRS transmission based on a lowest (orhighest) indexed SRS resource of one or more first SRS resources of thefirst SRS resource set. For example, the wireless device may determinean index of the third SRS resource (SRS with index i) is a lowest amongthe one or more first SRS resources. The wireless device may determinethe second transmission power based on a second PL-RS (PL-RS n)associated with the third SRS resource. For example, the second PL-RSmay be configured or associated with, via RRC, MAC-CE and/or DCIsignaling, a third TCI state (e.g., TCI k) of the third SRS resource.The wireless device may transmit the third SRS transmission based on thesecond transmission power and with a third spatial domain filterparameter determined based on the third TCI state. The wireless devicemay transmit the fourth SRS transmission based on the secondtransmission power and with a fourth spatial domain filter parameterdetermined based on a fourth TCI state (e.g., TCI l+r).

In an example, the wireless device may determine a PL-RS of an SRSresource set based on a lowest (or highest) indexed PL-RS of one or morePL-RSs associated with one or more SRS resources of the SRS resourceset. FIG. 26 illustrates an example of an embodiment as per an aspect ofan example embodiment of the present disclosure. FIG. 26 shows a similarscenario to FIG. 25 except a determination of a transmission power beingbased on a lowest (or highest) indexed PL-RS of a lowest (or highest)indexed SRS resource.

For the first SRS resource set, a list of PL-RSs (e.g., PL-RS m, . . .PL-RS m+s) may be associated with the one or more first SRS resources ofthe first SRS resource set. For example, a SRS resource i+2 (not shownin FIG. 26) may be associated with a TCI state with an index k (TCI k).The TCI state with the index k may be configured with or associated witha first PL-RS (PL-RS m). The wireless device may determine the secondtransmission power, for the third SRS transmission and the fourth SRStransmission at the third time, based on the first PL-RS (e.g., PL-RSm). The wireless device may determine the first transmission power, forthe first SRS transmission and the second SRS transmission at the secondtime, based on a second PL-RS (e.g., PL-RS n) for the second SRSresource set. The second PL-RS is a lowest (or highest) indexed PL-RS ofone or more second PL-RSs associated with one or more second SRSresources of the second SRS resource set.

In an example, the wireless device may be configured with a first set ofPL-RSs, where each of the first set of PL-RSs may be associated with aTCI state for a SRs resource of a list of SRS resources of an SRSresource set. The wireless device may receive one or more MAC CEs and/orDCIs activating one or more PL-RSs of the first set of PL-RSs. Thewireless device may determine a lowest (or highest) indexed PL-RS of theone or more PL-RSs for determining a transmission power of an SRSresource of the SRS resource set. The wireless device may ignore a PL-RSof the first set of PL-RSs when the PL-RS is not activated.

For example, the PL-RS may be activated based on a MAC CE activating thePL-RS. For example, the PL-RS may be activated based on a MAC CEactivating a TCI state that is configured with or associated with thePL-RS. For example, the wireless device may receive a MAC CE activatingone or more TCI states of a TCI pool. The wireless device may determineone or more PL-RSs associated with the one or more TCI states asactivated in response to the MAC CE activating the one or more TCIstates of the TCI pool.

In an example, the wireless device may determine a PL-RS of an SRSresource set based on a lowest (or highest) indexed TCI states of one ormore TCI states configured with or associated with one or more SRSresources of the SRS resource set. FIG. 27 illustrates an example of anembodiment as per an aspect of an example embodiment of the presentdisclosure. FIG. 27 shows a similar scenario to FIG. 25 except adetermination of a transmission power being based on a lowest (orhighest) indexed TCI state of a lowest (or highest) indexed SRSresource.

For the first SRS resource set, a list of TCI states (e.g., TCI k, . . ., TCI k+q) may be associated with the one or more first SRS resources ofthe first SRS resource set. For example, an SRS resource i+2 (not shownin FIG. 27) may be associated with a first TCI state with an index k(TCI k). The TCI state with the index k may be configured with orassociated with a first PL-RS (PL-RS m). The wireless device maydetermine the second transmission power, for the third SRS transmissionand the fourth SRS transmission at the third time, based on the firstTCI state (e.g., TCI k). The wireless device may determine the firsttransmission power, for the first SRS transmission and the second SRStransmission at the second time, based on a second TCI state (e.g., TCI1) for the second SRS resource set. The second TCI state is a lowest (orhighest) indexed TCI state of one or more second TCI states associatedwith one or more second SRS resources of the second SRS resource set.

In an example, the wireless device may be configured with a first set ofTCI states for a list of SRS resources of an SRS resource set. Thewireless device may receive one or more MAC CEs and/or DCIs activatingone or more TCI states of the first set of TCI states. The wirelessdevice may determine a lowest (or highest) indexed TCI state of the oneor more TCI states for determining a transmission power of an SRSresource of the SRS resource set. The wireless device may ignore a TCIstate of the first set of TCI states when the TCI state is notactivated.

In FIG. 27, for example, the lowest (or highest) indexed TCI state (TCIk) may not be activated. The wireless device may determine a lowest (orhighest) indexed TCI state from the one or more TCI states activatedfrom the first set of TCI states. The wireless device may determine thesecond transmission power based on a fourth TCI state (e.g., TCI k+q)based on a lowest (or highest) indexed TCI state from the one or moreTCI states.

In an example, the wireless device may determine the first transmissionpower based on a type of reference signal of one or more second PL-RSsof the second SRS resource set. The one or more second PL-RSs maycomprise PL-RS(s) being configured for or being associated with one orsecond TCI states. The one or more second TCI states may comprise TCIstate(s) that have been activated. The wireless device may determine aPL-RS based on a CSI-RS with a highest priority. The wireless device maydetermine a PL-RS of the CSI-RS from the one or more second PL-RSs. Thewireless device may determine a second PL-RS of a SSB in response to theone or more second PL-RSs not comprising the PL-RS of the CSI-RS. Thewireless device may determine a third PL-RS of a SRS in response to theone or more second PL-RSs not comprising the PL-RS of the CSI-RS and notcomprising the second PL-RS of the SSB.

The wireless device may determine a TCI state associated with orconfigured with a PL-RS of a CSI-RS first for determining a transmissionpower. When no PL-RS of the CSI-RS being present, the wireless devicemay determine a second TCI associated with or configured with a secondPL-Rs of a SSB second for the determining. When there are multiple TCIstates associated with PL-RS of one or more CSI-RS s, the wirelessdevice may determine a TCI from the multiple TCI states based on alowest (or highest) indexed TCI state from the multiple TCI states or alowest (or highest) indexed PL-RS from one or more PL-RSs of themultiple TCI states.

The wireless device may determine a TCI state or a PL-RS first based ona type of reference signal (e.g., CSI-RS>>SSB>>SRS, a priority order).When multiple candidates are present based on the type of referencesignal, the wireless device may select the TCI state or the PL-RS basedon a lowest (or highest) indexed SRS resource, a lowest (or highest)indexed TCI state or a lowest (or highest) indexed PL-RS.

In an example, a wireless device may receive one or more RRC messagescomprising configuration parameters. The configuration parameters maycomprise parameters of an SRS resource set. The parameters may comprisean index of the SRS resource set and a usage. For example, the usage mayindicate a beam management. The parameters may comprise a pathlossreference signal or a list of pathloss reference signals. The parametersmay comprise a list of SRS resources. An SRS resource may comprise anindex of the SRS resource, and a TCI state (e.g., tciState). The TCIstate may be configured with or associated with a first PL-RS. Thewireless device may determine a transmission power via the SRS resourceof the SRS resource set based on the pathloss reference signal or thelist of pathloss reference signals. The wireless device may not use ormay ignore the first PL-RS configured for or associated with the SRSresource.

The wireless device may not use or may ignore the first PL-RS configuredfor or associated with the SRS resource in response to the SRS resourcebeing of the SRS resource set with the usage of beam management. Thewireless device may determine a transmission power, of a SRStransmission of a second SRS resource of a second SRS resource set witha usage indicating non-beam management, based on a second TCI state ofthe second SRS resource. For example, the wireless device may determinethe transmission power of the SRS transmission based on a second PL-RSof or associated with the second TCI state in response to the second SRSresource being of the second SRS resource set of non-beam management.

The wireless device may determine a first transmission power, of a firstSRS transmission of the SRS resource of the SRS resource set, based onthe pathloss reference signal or the list of pathloss reference signals.For example, the wireless device may receive one or more MAC CEs and/orDCIs activating or indicating a first pathloss reference signal of thelist of pathloss reference signals for the SRS resource set. Thewireless device may determine the first transmission power based on thepathloss reference signal or the first pathloss reference signal. Thewireless device may determine the first transmission power based on thepathloss reference signal of the SRS resource set in response to theusage of the SRS resource set being the beam management. The wirelessdevice may determine the second transmission power based on the secondPL-RS of the second TCI state of the second SRS resource in response tothe second SRS resource belonging to the second SRS resource set with ausage being non-beam management.

In an example, a wireless device may receive one or more RRC messagesindicating configuration parameters. The configuration parameters maycomprise a first SRS resource set with a first usage of a beammanagement. The configuration parameters may comprise a second SRSresource set with a second usage of a codebook (e.g., a non-beammanagement). The first SRS resource set may comprise a first PL-RS. Afirst SRS resource of the first SRS resource set may comprise a firstTCI state associated with a second PL-RS. The second SRS resource setmay comprise a third PL-RS. A second SRS resource of the second SRSresource set may comprise a second TCI state associated with a fourthPL-RS.

In response to the first usage of the first SRS resource set being thebeam management, the wireless device may determine a first transmissionpower, via the first SRS resource, based on the first PL-RS (e.g., apathloss reference signal in the first SRS resource set). The wirelessdevice may ignore the second PL-RS of the first SRS resource in responseto the first usage being the beam management. In response to the secondusage of the second SRS set not being a beam management (e.g.,codebook), the wireless device may determine a second transmissionpower, via the second SRS resource, based on the fourth PL-RS (e.g., apathloss reference signal associated with the second SRS resource). Thewireless device may ignore the third PL-RS of the second SRS resourceset in response to the second usage not being the beam management.

In an example, the second SRS resource of the second SRS resource setmay not comprise the second TCI state. The wireless device may determinethe second TCI state based on a UL TCI of the uplink cell/carrier. Forexample, the wireless device may determine a second spatial domainfilter parameter for the second SRS resource based on a common uplinkbeam (the UL TCI). The wireless device may determine a first spatialdomain filter parameter for the first SRS resource based on the firstTCI associated with or configured with the first SRS resource.

Embodiments may determine a single pathloss reference signal for an SRSresource set regardless of TCI states associated with SRS resource(s) ofthe SRS resource set. The SRS resource set may be configured with ausage of a beam management. The wireless device may determine a singletransmission power for a plurality of BM-SRS transmissions based on theSRS resource set. Embodiments allow a consistent configurationparameters for a SRS resource set regardless of a usage of the SRSresource set.

In an example, a base station may transmit one or more RRC messagescomprising configuration parameters. The configuration parameters mayindicate a plurality of SRS resources of an SRS resource set. Each ofthe plurality of SRS resources may be configured with a TCI state. Oneor more TCI states may be associated with the plurality of SRSresources. Each of the one or more TCI states may be associated with orconfigured with a PL-RS. One or more PL-RSs may be configured for orassociated with the one or more TCI states. The base station may ensurea number of the one or more PL-RSs being one for the SRS resource set.The base station may configure or enable a single PL-RS for the SRSresource set.

A wireless device may assume that a single PL-RS may be associated withor configured with one or more TCI states of one or more SRS resourcesof an SRS resource set.

Embodiments may limit configuration flexibility. Embodiments maysimplify a complexity of the wireless device.

In an example, a wireless device may receive one or more RRC messagescomprising configuration parameters. The configuration parameters mayindicate a plurality of SRS resources of an SRS resource set. Each ofthe plurality of SRS resources may be configured with a TCI state. Oneor more TCI states may be associated with the plurality of SRSresources. Each of the one or more TCI states may be associated with orconfigured with a PL-RS. One or more PL-RSs may be configured for orassociated with the one or more TCI states.

In an example, the wireless device may determine a transmission power,of a SRS transmission via a SRS resource of the SRS resource set, basedon a UL TCI of an uplink carrier/cell. The SRS resource set is of theuplink carrier/cell. The UL TCI may be a common uplink beam for theuplink carrier/cell. The UL TCI may be a common uplink beam for acoreset pool of the uplink carrier/cell. The wireless device maydetermine the transmission power based on a PL-RS associated with orconfigured for the UL TCI. The wireless device may transmit the SRStransmission with the transmission power based on the UL TCI and with aspatial domain filter parameter based on a TCI state associated with orconfigured with the SRS resource.

The TCI state may be different from the UL TCI. The TCI state may besame as the UL TCI.

The wireless device may use a PL-RS of an UL TCI for a transmissionpower for an SRS transmission. The wireless device may use a first TCIstate of an SRS resource for a spatial domain filter parameter for theSRS transmission. For example, the first TCI state may be associatedwith a first PL-RS. The first PL-RS may be different from PL-RS. Thefirst PL-RS may be same to PL-RS. The wireless device may ignore thefirst PL-RS.

The wireless device may determine the UL TCI of a coreset pool of theuplink carrier/cell. The coreset pool of the uplink carrier/cell maycomprise the SRS resource set. For example, when a second coreset poolof the uplink carrier/cell is configured with a second SRS resource set,the wireless device may determine a transmission power of a second SRStransmission via the second SRS resource set based on a second UL TCI.The second UL TCI may be an uplink common beam for the second coresetpool of the uplink carrier/cell.

In an example, the UL TCI may be configured with or associated with aPL-RS. The PL-RS may be a reference signal of the UL TCI. The PL-RS maybe a SSB that has a qcl-ed with a reference signal of the UL TCI. ThePL-RS may be configured. When a reference signal of the UL TCI is a SRS,a PL-RS may be determined based on a DL TCI of a downlink carrier/cell.The downlink carrier/cell may belong to a serving cell to the uplinkcarrier/cell. The DL TCI may be a common downlink beam for the coresetpool of the downlink carrier/cell.

The wireless device may determine a PL-RS of a SRS resource set fordetermining a transmission power for uplink signals via PUSCHs, PUCCHresources or SRS resources. The SRS resource set may belong to a coresetpool of an uplink carrier/cell. The PUSCHs, the PUCCH resources or theSRS resources may belong to the coreset pool of the uplink carrier/cell.

In an example, the wireless device may determine a transmission power,of a SRS resource of a SRS resource set of a coreset pool of an uplinkcarrier/cell, based on a PL-RS of the SRS resource set in response tothe SRS resource set comprising the PL-RS. The wireless device maydetermine the transmission power based on a second PL-RS of a UL TCI ofthe coreset pool of the uplink carrier/cell in response to the SRSresource set not comprising the PL-RS. The wireless device mayprioritize explicit configuration for a pathloss reference signaldetermination. When no explicit configuration being available, thewireless device may use a pathloss reference signal associated with orconfigured with an uplink common beam of the coreset pool of the uplinkcarrier/cell.

In an example, a base station may transmit one or more second RRCmessages comprising second configuration parameters. The secondconfiguration parameters may indicate or comprise an indication of atype of PL-RS for determining a transmission power for an SRS resource.For example, the indication may indicate to use a PL-RS of an SRSresource set. For example, the indication may indicate to use a secondPL-RS of the SRS resource where the second PL-RS is configured with orassociated with a TCI state of the SRS resource.

The indication may indicate to use a PL-RS of a SRS resource set or touse a second PL-RS associated with a SRS resource of the SRS resourceset.

In an example, a wireless device may be scheduled with a plurality ofSRS transmissions in a slot or in a few consecutive slots. The pluralityof SRS transmissions may be based on a plurality of SRS resources of anSRS resource set. Each of the plurality of SRS resources may beconfigured with or associated with a TCI state. One or more TCI statesmay be configured for or associated with the plurality of SRS resources.Each of the one or more TCI states may be configured with or associatedwith a PL-RS. One or more PL-RSs may be associated with or configuredfor the one or more TCI states.

The wireless device may determine a first transmission power, of a firsttransmission of the plurality of SRS transmissions, based on a first TCIstate of a first SRS resource of the plurality of SRS resources. Thefirst transmission may be an earliest transmission of the plurality ofSRS transmissions. The first SRS resource may be an SRS resource usedfor the first transmission. The first TCI state may be configured for orassociated with the first SRS resource.

The wireless device may use the first transmission power for a secondtransmission of the plurality of SRS transmissions. The wireless devicemay use a transmission power of an earliest SRS transmission for theplurality of SRS transmissions.

In an example, the wireless device may determine a plurality oftransmissions powers for the plurality of SRS transmissions. Each of theplurality of transmission powers may correspond to each of the pluralityof SRS transmissions. The wireless device may determine a singletransmission power from the plurality of transmission powers. Forexample, the single transmission power may be a largest or maximum valuefrom the plurality of transmission powers. The single transmission powermay be a smallest or minimum value from the plurality of transmissionpowers. The single transmission power may be an average value of theplurality of transmission powers. The single transmission power may be amedian value of the plurality of transmission powers.

FIG. 28 illustrates an example embodiment as per an aspect of an exampleembodiment of the present disclosure.

The base station may transmit one or more RRC messages at a first time(T0) indicating/comprising a set of TCI states for a coreset pool/panelof an uplink carrier. The one or more RRC messages may indicate/comprisea plurality of sets of TCI states when the uplink carrier comprises aplurality of coreset pools or panels. The base station may transmit oneor more MAC CEs activating one or more TCI states of the set of TCIstates. The base station may transmit a DCI at a second time (T1)indicating/activating a UL TCI state of the one or more TCI states for acommon uplink beam/TCI state. The wireless device may apply or updatethe UL TCI state for multiple target signals/channels. For example, thetarget signals may comprise uplink signal(s) via a PUSCH, a PUCCH or anSRS via a non-beam management SRS resource set (e.g., an SRS resourcewith codebook, non-codebook or antenna switching). At a third time, thewireless device may transmit one or more uplink signals via the multipletarget channels based on the UL TCI state (ULTCI). For example, FIG. 28illustrates PUCCH, PUSCH and SRS transmission based on the UL TCI. Thewireless device may determine transmission power(s)of the one or moreuplink signals based on a PL-RS associated with or configured for the ULTCI.

The wireless device may transmit, at a fourth time (T3), a beammanagement SRS (BM-SRS) transmission that may indicate an SRStransmission via a beam-management SRS resource set (e.g., the SRSresource set with a usage of beam management). The wireless device maydetermine a second transmission power for the BM-SRS transmission basedon the PL-RS. The wireless device may transmit the BM-SRS transmissionwith a second TCI state that is configured for a BM-SRS resource of thebeam-management SRS resource set. The wireless device may transmit theBM-SRS transmission via the BM-SRS resource.

Embodiments may reduce a complexity of the wireless device. Embodimentsmay determine a single PL-RS for a SRS resource set.

In an example, a wireless device may receive one or more MAC CEsupdating or indicating or activating a pathloss reference for an SRSresource set. FIG. 29A illustrates an example format of a MAC CEupdating a pathloss reference RS for an SRS resource set as per anaspect of an example embodiment of the present disclosure.

For example, the MAC CE (e.g., SRS pathloss reference RS update MAC CE)may be identified by a MAC subheader with a LCID (e.g., code point 247,index 311). The MAC CE may have a predefined bit size (e.g., 24 bits).The MAC CE comprise a serving cell index (Serving Cell ID). The servingcell index may indicate an identify of a serving cell that comprises anSRS resource set.

The MAC CE comprises a BWP index (BWP ID) that comprises the SRSresource set. The MAC CE may comprise an SRS resource set index SRSresource Set ID) that is an index of the SRS resource set. The MAC CEmay comprise an index of a pathloss reference RS (pathloss reference RSID) that is an index of a pathloss reference signal (PL-RS) activatedfor the SRS resource set. The MAC CE may comprise one or more reservedbits (Rs) where a reserved bit is indicated with a predetermined value(e.g., 0).

In an example, a wireless device may receive a MAC CE updating a PL-RSof an SRS resource set in response to a usage of the SRS resource setbeing a beam management. The wireless device may not expect to receive asecond MAC CE updating a second PL-RS of a second SRS resource set inresponse to the second usage of the second RSR resource set beingdifferent from the beam management. The wireless device may not expectto receive the second MAC CE for the second SRS resource set in responseto the second usage of the second RSR resource set being different fromthe beam management and the wireless device being enabled or configuredwith the second TCI indication mechanism.

In example, a wireless device may receive a TCI Pathloss Reference RSupdate MAC CE (e.g., TCI-PL-RS MAC CE). FIG. 29B illustrates an exampleformat of a MAC CE updating a pathloss reference RS for a TCI state asper an aspect of an example embodiment of the present disclosure.

For example, the TCI-PL-RS MAC CE (e.g., TCI pathloss reference RSupdate MAC CE) may be identified by a MAC subheader with a LCID (e.g.,code point 247, index 400). The MAC CE may have a predefined bit size(e.g., 24 bits). The MAC CE comprise a serving cell index (Serving CellID). The serving cell index may indicate an identify of a serving cellthat comprises a TCI state. For example, when a TCI state may beconfigured for a cell group of a simultaneous TCI state update or a cellgroup of a simultaneous common beam update cell (e.g., simultaneouscommon beam update cell list), the TCI-PL-RS-MAC CE may be applied toone or more cells of the simultaneous common beam update cell list orthe cell group of the simultaneous TCI state update or the cell group ofthe simultaneous common beam update cell.

For example, when the serving cell may belong to a cell group of asimultaneous TCI state update or a cell group of a simultaneous commonbeam update cell (e.g., simultaneous common beam update cell list), theTCI-PL-RS-MAC CE may be applied to one or more cells of the simultaneouscommon beam update cell list or the cell group of the simultaneous TCIstate update or the cell group of the simultaneous common beam updatecell.

The MAC CE comprises a BWP index (BWP ID) that comprises the TCI state.The BWP index may not be present when a simultaneous common beam updatecell list is configured. The wireless device may determine or update aUL TCI and/or a DL TCI for one or more cells of the simultaneous commonbeam update cell list.

The MAC CE may comprise a TCI state index (TCI state ID) is an index ofthe TCI state. The MAC CE may comprise an index of a pathloss referenceRS (pathloss reference RS ID) that is an index of a pathloss referencesignal (PL-RS) activated for the TCI state. The MAC CE may comprise oneor more reserved bits (Rs) where a reserved bit is indicated with apredetermined value (e.g., 0).

For example, a wireless device may be configured with one or more SRSresources of an SRS resource set. The SRS resource set may beenabled/activated with a usage of a beam management. The wireless devicemay receive a TCI-PL-RS MAC CE updating a PL-RS of a TCI state. Forexample, the TCI state may be associated with an SRS resource of the oneor more SRS resources. In response to receiving the TCI-PL-RS MAC CE,the wireless device may update association of one or more TCI states ofthe one or more SRS resources to the PL-RS.

For example, one or more TCI states, for determining a PL-RS for a SRSresource set, may represent one or more activated TCI states based onone or more MAC CEs and/or DCI signaling. For example, one or morePL-RSs, for determining a PL-RS for the SRS resource set, may representone or more activated PL-RSs based on one or more second MAC CEs and/orsecond DCI signaling.

In an example, a wireless device may receive one or more RRC messagesindicating configuration parameters. The configuration parameters maycomprise a first sounding reference signal (SRS) resource set. The firstSRS resource set may indicate a first SRS resource and a first usage ofa beam management. The first SRS resource may be associated with a firsttransmission configuration indicator (TCI) state and a first pathlossreference signal (PL-RS). The configuration parameters may comprise asecond SRS resource set. The second SRS resource set may indicate asecond SRS resource and a second usage other than the beam management.The second SRS resource may be associated with a second TCI state and asecond PL-RS. The configuration parameters may comprise/indicate a firstPL-RS for the first SRS resource set. In response to the first SRSresource set being indicated with the usage of the beam management, thewireless device may transmit a first SRS transmission via the first SRSresource and with a first transmission power. The wireless device maydetermine the first transmission power based on the first PL-RSconfigured with or of the first SRS resource set. In response to thesecond SRS resource set being indicated with the second usage other thanthe beam management, the wireless device may transmit a second SRStransmission via the second SRS resource and with a second transmissionpower. The wireless device may determine the second transmission powerbased on the second PL-RS.

According to an example embodiment, the second usage of the second SRSresource set may be one of a codebook, a non-codebook or an antennaswitching.

According to an example embodiment, the wireless device may receive oneor more RRC messages indicating a set of TCI states. The set of TCIstates may comprise the first TCI state and the second TCI state. Thewireless device may receive one or more MAC CEs activating one or moreactivated TCI states of the set of TCI states. For example, the one ormore activated TCI states may comprise the second TCI state. Forexample, the one or more activated TCI states may comprise the first TCIstate and the second TCI state. The wireless device may receive a DCIindicating the second TCI state of the one or more activated TCI states.The wireless device may determine spatial domain filter parameters ofone or more uplink channels or uplink signals based on the second TCIstate. For example, the one or more uplink channels may comprisephysical uplink shared channel (PUSCH), a physical uplink controlchannel (PUCCH) or an aperiodic SRS (ap-SRS). The one or more uplinksignals do not comprise an SRS transmission via the second SRS resourceset. The one or more uplink signals do not comprise the second SRS.

The second TCI state may be a UL TCI of an uplink carrier. The UL TCImay be an uplink TCI state or a common uplink TCI state. The uplinkcarrier comprises the first SRS resource set and the second SRS resourceset. The wireless device may update the first PL-RS based on the secondPL-RS in response to receiving the DCI. For example, the first PL-RS maybe set to the second PL-RS in response to receiving the DCI.

In an example, a wireless device may receive one or more RRC messagesindicating configuration parameters. The configuration parameters mayindicate an SRS resource set with a usage of a beam management. The SRSresource may comprise a first SRS resource with a first index and asecond SRS resource with a second index. The wireless device maydetermine a transmission power, based on a first transmissionconfiguration indicator (TCI) state of the first SRS resource inresponse to the first index being smaller than the second index, for afirst SRS transmission via the first SRS resource and a second SRStransmission via the second SRS. The wireless device may transmit thefirst SRS transmission based on the transmission power and the first TCIstate of the first SRS resource. The wireless device may transmit thesecond SRS transmission based on the transmission power and a second CIstate of the second SRS resource.

According to an example embodiment, the wireless device may determinethe transmission power based on a pathloss reference signal associatedwith the first TCI state. The wireless device may determine thetransmission power based on a reference signal of the first TCI state.The wireless device may determine the transmission power based on apathloss reference signal configured for the first TCI state.

In an example, a wireless device may receive one or more RRC messagesindicating configuration parameters. The configuration parameters mayindicate a sounding reference signal (SRS) resource set. A usage of theSRS resource may be a beam management. The SRS resource set may comprisea first SRS resource and a second SRS resource. The wireless device maydetermine a transmission power based on a first transmissionconfiguration indicator (TCI) state of the first SRS resource inresponse to a condition being satisfied. The wireless device maytransmit the first SRS transmission based on the transmission power andthe first TCI state of the first SRS resource. The wireless device maytransmit the second SRS transmission based on the transmission power anda second TCI state of the second SRS resource.

According to an example embodiment, the wireless device may determinethe condition being satisfied in response to a first index of the firstSRS resource being lower than a second index of the second SRS resource.The wireless device may determine the condition being satisfied inresponse to a third index of the first TCI state being lower than afourth index of the second TCI state. The wireless device may determinethe condition being satisfied in response to a fifth index of a firstpathloss reference signal (PL-RS) being lower than a sixth index of asecond PL-RS. The first PL-RS may be associated with the first TCIstate. The second PL-RS may be associated with the second TCI state. Thewireless device may determine the transmission power based on the firstPL-RS associated with the first TCI state in response to the conditionbeing satisfied.

In an example, a wireless device may receive one or more RRC messagesindicating configuration parameters. The configuration parameters mayindicate/comprise a set of transmission configuration indicator (TCI)states. The set of TCI states may comprise a first TCI state and anuplink TCI state. The configuration parameters may indicate/comprise afirst sounding reference signal (SRS) resource set. The first SRSresource set may comprise a beam management first SRS (BM-SRS) resourceand a first usage indicating a beam management. For example, the BM-SRSresource may be associated with the first TCI state. The configurationparameters may indicate/comprise a second SRS resource set. The secondSRS resource set may comprise an SRS resource and a second usageindicating other than the beam management. For example, the second usagemay indicate a codebook, a non-codebook or an antenna switching. Thewireless device may receive a downlink control information (DCI). TheDCI may indicate the uplink TCI state (UL TCI) for a plurality of uplinkchannels. The plurality of uplink channels may comprise a SRStransmission via the SRS resource. For example, the UL TCI may beassociated with a pathloss RS (PL-RS). The wireless device may transmita BM-SRS transmission, via the BM-SRS resource, with a firsttransmission power determined based on the PL-RS and with the first TCIstate. The wireless device may transmit the SRS transmission, via theSRS resource, with a second transmission power determined based on thePL-RS and with the UL TCI.

According to an example embodiment, the first TCI state may be differentfrom the UL TCI. The wireless device may determine a first spatialdomain filter parameter, of an uplink signal via one of the plurality ofuplink channels, based on the UL TCI. The plurality of uplink channelsmay comprise a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH), a physical uplinkcontrol channel (PUCCH) and an SRS via the second SRS resource set. Theplurality of uplink channels may not comprise a second SRS via the firstSRS resource set.

According to an example embodiment, an uplink bandwidth part of anuplink carrier may comprise the first SRS resource set and the secondSRS resource set.

According to an example embodiment, the UL TCI may be a common uplinkTCI state for the uplink carrier. The first coreset pool of the uplinkcarrier may comprise the first SRS resource set and the second SRSresource set. The UL TCI may be a common uplink TCI state of the firstcoreset pool of the uplink carrier. The wireless device may update thecommon uplink TCI based on the receiving the DCI. The common uplink TCIstate may be set to the uplink TCI state. The UL TCI may be associatedwith the PL-RS in response to the UL TCI comprises an index of thePL-RS. The UL TCI may be associated with the PL-RS in response toreceiving one or more medium access control control element (MAC-CE)indicating mapping the UL TCI and the PL-RS.

According to an example embodiment, the UL TCI may be associated withthe PL-RS in response to receiving one or more DCIs indicating thePL-RS. The wireless device may update PL-RS of the UL TCI in response tothe one or more DCIs.

According to an example embodiment, the wireless device may determine afirst spatial domain filter parameter of the BM-SRS transmission basedon a first reference signal of the first TCI state. The wireless devicemay transmit the BM-SRS transmission based on the first spatial domainfilter parameter. The wireless device may determine a second spatialdomain filter parameter of the SRS transmission based on a secondreference signal of the UL TCI. The wireless device may transmit the SRStransmission based on the second spatial domain filter parameter.

According to an example embodiment, the wireless device may receive oneor more RRC messages indicating the first SRS resource set comprising asecond PL-RS. The wireless device may determine the first transmissionpower based on the second PL-RS in response to the first resource setcomprising the second PL-RS. The wireless device may determine the firsttransmission power based on the PL-RS in response to the first resourceset not comprising the second PL-RS.

In an example, a wireless device may receive one or more RRC messagesindicating configuration parameters. The configuration parameters mayindicate/comprise a set of transmission configuration indicator (TCI)states. The set of TCI states may comprise a first TCI state and anuplink TCI state. The configuration parameters may indicate/comprise afirst sounding reference signal (SRS) resource set. The first SRSresource set may comprise a beam management first SRS (BM-SRS) resourceand a first usage indicating a beam management. For example, the BM-SRSresource may be associated with the first TCI state. The configurationparameters may indicate/comprise a second SRS resource set. The secondSRS resource set may comprise an SRS resource and a second usageindicating other than the beam management. For example, the second usagemay indicate a codebook, a non-codebook or an antenna switching. Thewireless device may receive a downlink control information (DCI). TheDCI may indicate the uplink TCI state (UL TCI) for a plurality of uplinkchannels. The plurality of uplink channels may comprise a SRStransmission via the SRS resource. For example, the UL TCI may beassociated with a pathloss RS (PL-RS). The wireless device may determinea second PL-RS for a BM-SRS transmission of the first SRS resource setbased on a first PL-RS configured for the first SRs resource set or thePL-RS in response to the first PL-RS being absent. The wireless devicemay transmit a BM-SRS transmission, via the BM-SRS resource, with afirst transmission power determined based on the second PL-RS and withthe first TCI state. The wireless device may transmit the SRStransmission, via the SRS resource, with a second transmission powerdetermined based on the PL-RS and with the UL TCI.

What is claimed is:
 1. A method comprising: receiving, by a wirelessdevice, configuration parameters indicating a sounding reference signal(SRS) resource set that is associated with a pathloss reference signal(PL-RS) and comprises a first SRS resource; receiving a downlink controlinformation indicating a transmission configuration indicator (TCI)state for a physical shared data channel (PUSCH); determining a transmitpower for the PUSCH based on the PL-RS, in response to: the TCI statebeing associated with the first SRS resource of the SRS resource set;and the SRS resource set being configured for beam management; andtransmitting, based on the transmit power and using the TCI state, atransport block via the PUSCH.
 2. The method of claim 1, wherein the SRSresource set comprises SRS resources having respective SRS resourceindexes, and wherein the PL-RS is determined further based on the PL-RSbeing associated with a SRS resource, of the SRS resources, having thelowest index.
 3. The method of claim 1, wherein the SRS resource setfurther comprises a second SRS resource associated with the PL-RS, andwherein the first SRS resource is associated with a first PL-RS.
 4. Themethod of claim 3, wherein the determining the transmit power is basedon the PL-RS and not the first PL-RS associated with the first SRSresource.
 5. The method of claim 1, wherein the TCI state beingassociated with the first SRS resource comprises the first SRS resourcebeing a spatial relation RS of the TCI state.
 6. The method of claim 1,wherein the TCI state being associated with the first SRS resourcecomprises the first SRS resource being a quasi-colocation RS of the TCIstate.
 7. The method of claim 1, wherein the SRS resource set beingconfigured for beam management comprises the SRS resource set beingconfigured, by a radio resource control (RRC) message, to be used forbeam management for uplink by the wireless device.
 8. The method ofclaim 7, wherein the configuration parameters are received in an RRCmessage that indicates that the SRS resource set is configured for beammanagement for uplink by the wireless device.
 9. The method of claim 1,wherein the TCI state is a common TCI state or a unified TCI state. 10.The method of claim 9, wherein the common TCI state or the unified TCIstate is applied by the wireless device for multiple uplink channels oruplink signals.
 11. A wireless device comprising: one or moreprocessors; and memory storing instructions that, when executed by theone or more processors, cause the wireless device to: receiveconfiguration parameters indicating a sounding reference signal (SRS)resource set that is associated with a pathloss reference signal (PL-RS)and comprises a first SRS resource; receive a downlink controlinformation indicating a transmission configuration indicator (TCI)state for a physical shared data channel (PUSCH); determine a transmitpower for the PUSCH based on the PL-RS, in response to: the TCI statebeing associated with the first SRS resource of the SRS resource set;and the SRS resource set being configured for beam management; andtransmit, based on the transmit power and using the TCI state, atransport block via the PUSCH.
 12. The wireless device of claim 11,wherein the SRS resource set comprises SRS resources having respectiveSRS resource indexes, and wherein the PL-RS is determined further basedon the PL-RS being associated with a SRS resource, of the SRS resources,having the lowest index.
 13. The wireless device of claim 11, whereinthe SRS resource set further comprises a second SRS resource associatedwith the PL-RS, and wherein the first SRS resource is associated with afirst PL-RS.
 14. The wireless device of claim 13, wherein thedetermination of the transmit power is based on the PL-RS and not thefirst PL-RS associated with the first SRS resource.
 15. The wirelessdevice of claim 11, wherein the TCI state being associated with thefirst SRS resource comprises the first SRS resource comprising a spatialrelation RS of the TCI state.
 16. The wireless device of claim 11,wherein the TCI state being associated with the first SRS resourcecomprises the first SRS resource comprising a quasi-colocation RS of theTCI state.
 17. The wireless device of claim 11, wherein the SRS resourceset being configured for beam management comprises the SRS resource setbeing configured, by a radio resource control (RRC) message, to be usedfor beam management for uplink by the wireless device.
 18. The wirelessdevice of claim 17, wherein the configuration parameters are received inan RRC message that indicates that the SRS resource set is configuredfor beam management for uplink by the wireless device.
 19. The wirelessdevice of claim 11, wherein the TCI state is a common TCI state or aunified TCI state, and wherein the common TCI state or the unified TCIstate is applied by the wireless device for multiple uplink channels ormultiple uplink signals.
 20. A system comprising: a base stationcomprising one or more first processors and first memory storing firstinstructions that, when executed by the one or more first processors,cause the base station to: transmit configuration parameters indicatinga sounding reference signal (SRS) resource set that is associated with apathloss reference signal (PL-RS) and comprises a first SRS resource;transmit a downlink control information (DCI) indicating a transmissionconfiguration indicator (TCI) state for a physical shared data channel(PUSCH); and receive, based on a transmit power and using the TCI state,a transport block via the PUSCH; and a wireless device comprising one ormore second processors and second memory storing second instructionsthat, when executed by the one or more second processors, cause thewireless device to: receive the configuration parameters; receive theDCI; determine the transmit power for the PUSCH based on the PL-RS, inresponse to: the TCI state being associated with the first SRS resourceof the SRS resource set; and the SRS resource set being configured forbeam management; and transmit, based on the determined transmit powerand using the TCI state, the transport block via the PUSCH.